Part Number Hot Search : 
MC141 2SK301 MM3Z5533 EE25F H1100 90000 MLX10801 1N5927B
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP88CS43FG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/X Series
TMP88CS43FG
TMP88CS43FG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023 _ D TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A The Toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These Toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of Toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C The products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_F For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
(c) 2006 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All Rights Reserved
Revision History
Date 2006/5/31 2006/6/20 2006/8/2 2007/7/11 Revision 1 2 3 4 First Release Contents Revised Periodical updating.No change in contents. Contents Revised
Table of Contents
TMP88CS43FG
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 9 Program Memory (ROM) ........................................................................................................................ 10 Data Memory (RAM) ............................................................................................................................... 10 System Clock Control Circuit .................................................................................................................. 11
Clock Generator Timing Generator Standby Control Circuit Controlling Operation Modes External Reset Input Adress Trap Reset Watchdog Timer Reset System Clock Reset
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.4.1 2.1.4.2 2.1.4.3 2.1.4.4 2.1.5.1 2.1.5.2 2.1.5.3 2.1.5.4
Reset Circuit ........................................................................................................................................... 23
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 3.2 3.3 Interrupt latches (IL38 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 30 Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 31
Using Automatic register bank switcing Using register bank switching Using PUSH and POP instructions Using data transfer instructions
3.2.1 3.2.2
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 27 Individual interrupt enable flags (EF38 to EF3) ...................................................................................... 27
3.3.1 3.3.2
3.4 3.5
3.3.3 3.4.1 3.4.2
3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2 3.3.2.3 3.3.2.4
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 34 Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 34
Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 33
4. Special Function Register
4.1 4.2 SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
i
5. Input/Output Ports
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 Port P0 (P03 to P00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P2 (P22 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P3 (P37 to P30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P4 (P47 to P40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P5 (P57 to P50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P6 (P67 to P60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P7 (P77 to P70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P8 (P87 to P80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P9 (P97 to P90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 53 55 56
6. Time Base Timer (TBT) and Divider Output (DVO)
6.1 6.2 Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.1 7.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ................................................................... Watchdog Timer Enable ......................................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................ Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)...................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Reset ........................................................................................................................... 62 63 64 64 65
7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.1 8.2 8.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. External Trigger Timer Mode .................................................................................................................. Event Counter Mode ............................................................................................................................... Window Mode ......................................................................................................................................... Pulse Width Measurement Mode............................................................................................................ Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode ............................................................................. 70 72 74 75 76 79
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
9.1 9.2 9.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Timer mode with software start............................................................................................................... Timer mode with external trigger start .................................................................................................... Event counter mode................................................................................................................................ Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) output mode .............................................................................. 87 88 89 90
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4
ii
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter 3 (TC3)
10.1 10.2 10.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10.3.1 Timer mode........................................................................................................................................... 97 Figure 10-3 ...................................................................................................................................................... 99 10.3.3 Capture Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 100
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter 4 (TC4)
11.1 11.2 11.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Timer Mode......................................................................................................................................... Event Counter Mode ........................................................................................................................... Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode ....................................................................................... Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode .................................................................................... 103 103 103 104
11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
12.1 12.2 12.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6) .................................................................................................... 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)................................................................. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6).............................................................. 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................ 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6) ........................................... 112 113 113 115 117 118 118 121
12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 12.3.5 12.3.6 12.3.7 12.3.8
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
13.1 13.2 13.3 Outline of Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Configuration of the Motor Control Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Position Detection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Configuration of the position detection unit......................................................................................... 128 Position Detection Circuit Register Functions..................................................................................... 129 Outline Processing in the Position Detection Unit .............................................................................. 132
13.4 13.5
13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 13.4.1
Timer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuration of the Timer Unit ........................................................................................................... 134
Timer Circuit Register Functions Outline Processing in the Timer Unit
13.4.1.1 13.4.1.2
Three-phase PWM Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Configuration of the three-phase PWM output unit............................................................................. 138
Pulse width modulation circuit (PWM waveform generating unit) Commutation control circuit
13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 13.5.4 13.5.5
13.5.1.1 13.5.1.2
13.6
Electrical Angle Timer and Waveform Arithmetic Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Register Functions of the Waveform Synthesis Circuit....................................................................... Port output as set with UOC/VOC/WOC bits and UPWM/VPWM/WPWM bits................................... Protective Circuit................................................................................................................................. Functions of Protective Circuit Registers ............................................................................................
142 144 146 148
iii
13.6.1
Electrical Angle Timer and Waveform Arithmetic Circuit .................................................................... 151
Functions of the Electrical Angle Timer and Waveform Arithmetic Circuit Registers List of PMD Related Control Registers
13.6.1.1 13.6.1.2
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART)
14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 168 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 168 169 169 169 170 170 171
163 164 166 167 167 168 168 168
14.8.1 14.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
14.9.1 14.9.2 14.9.3 14.9.4 14.9.5 14.9.6
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
15.1 15.2 15.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Clock source ....................................................................................................................................... 175 Shift edge............................................................................................................................................ 177
Leading edge Trailing edge Internal clock External clock 15.3.1.1 15.3.1.2 15.3.2.1 15.3.2.2
15.3.1 15.3.2
15.4 15.5 15.6
Number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 178 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 180 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 181
15.6.1 15.6.2 15.6.3
16. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
16.1 16.2 16.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Software Start Mode ........................................................................................................................... 187 Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 187 Register Setting ................................................................................................................................ 188
16.4 16.5 16.6
16.3.1 16.3.2 16.3.3
STOP mode during AD Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... 191
16.6.1
iv
16.6.2 16.6.3
Analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... 191 Noise Countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 191
17. 8-Bit High-speed PWM (HPWM0 and HPWM1)
17.1 17.2 17.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Operation modes ................................................................................................................................ 194
8-bit mode 7-bit mode 6-bit mode 17.3.1.1 17.3.1.2 17.3.1.3
17.3.1
17.3.2
Setting output data.............................................................................................................................. 197
18. Input/Output Circuitry
18.1 18.2 Control pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Input/output ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.5 19.6 19.7
19.5 19.5
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD Conversion Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................................................
............................................................................................................................................................... 203 ............................................................................................................................................................... 203
201 202 202 203 203 203
Recommended Oscillation Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
20. Package Dimensions
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/X (LSI).
v
vi
TMP88CS43FG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP88CS43FG
Product No. TMP88CS43FG ROM (MaskROM) 65536 bytes RAM 2176 bytes Package QFP80-P-1420-0.80B OTP MCU TMP88PS43FG
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/X series - Instruction execution time : 0.20 s (at 20 MHz) - 181 types & 842 basic instructions 2. 35 interrupt sources (External : 6 Internal : 29) 3. Input / Output ports (71 pins) Large current output: 24pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive 4. Prescaler - Time base timer Divider output function (DVO) 5. Watchdog Timer Select of "internal reset request" or "interrupt request". 6. 16-bit timer counter: 1 ch - Timer, External trigger, Window, Pulse width measurement, Event counter, Programmable pulse generate (PPG) modes 7. 16-bit timer/counter(CTC): 1ch - CTC:Timer,event counter or PPG (Programmable Pulse) output 8. 8-bit timer counter : 1 ch - Timer, Event counter, Capture modes 9. 8-bit timer counter : 1 ch
060116EBP
* The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D * TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A * The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B * The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q * The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C * The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_E * For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP88CS43FG
- Timer, Event counter, Pulse width modulation (PWM) output, Programmable divider output (PDO) modes 10. 8-bit timer counter : 2 ch - Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO), Pulse width modulation (PWM) output, Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes 11. Programmable motor driver (PMD) : 2 ch - Sine wave drive circuit (built-in sine wave data-table RAM) Rotor position detect function Motor contro timer and capture function Overload protective function Auto commutation and auto position detection start function 12. 8-bit UART : 1 ch 13. 8-bit SIO: 1 ch 14. 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter - Analog input: 16 ch 15. 8-bit High-speed PWM (HPWM0 and HPWM1) 16. Clock oscillation circuit : 1 set 17. Low power consumption operation (2 modes) - STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.) - IDLE mode: CPU stops. Only peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs (CPU restarts). 18. Operation voltage:
4.5 V to 5.5 V at 20MHz
Page 2
TMP88CS43FG
1.2 Pin Assignment
VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD (TC3/INT3) P21 (PWM4/PDO4/TC4/INT4) P22
RESET
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
(STOP/INT5) P20 (Z1) P30 (Y1) P31 (X1) P32 (W1) P33 (V1) P34 (U1) P35 (EMG1) P36 (CL1) P37 (PDW1) P40 (PDV1) P41 (PDU1) P42 (SCK) P43 (SI/RXD1) P44 (SO/TXD1) P45 (PPG2) P46
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(INT0) P10 (INT1) P11 (TC1/INT2) P12 (TC5/DVO) P13 (PWM5/PDO5/PPG1) P14 (PDU2) P15 (PDV2) P16 (PDW2) P17 (CL2) P50 (EMG2) P51 (U2) P52 (V2) P53 (W2) P54 (X2) P55 (Y2) P56 (Z2) P57
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P03 (HPWM1) P02 (HPWM0) P01 (TXD2/PDO6/PWM6/PPG6) P00 (RXD2/TC6) P97 P96 P95 P94 P93 P92 P91 P90 P87 P86 P85 P84 P83 P82 P81 P80 AVSS AVDD VAREF P77 (AIN15/DBOUT2)
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
P76 (AIN14) P75 (AIN13) P74 (AIN12) P73 (AIN11) P72 (AIN10) P71 (AIN9) P70 (AIN8) P67 (AIN7/DBOUT1) P66 (AIN6) P65 (AIN5) P64(AIN4) P63(AIN3) P62(AIN2) P61(AIN1) P60(AIN0) P47(CTC)
Page 3
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP88CS43FG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP88CS43FG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/4)
Pin Name P03
HPWM1
Pin Number 64
Input/Output IO O IO O IO O O IO I I IO I IO I IO I IO O O IO O I IO I I IO I IO I IO I I O IO I I IO I I IO I IO I IO O
Functions PORT03 High-spped PWM1 output PORT02 High-spped PWM0 output PORT01 UART data output 2 PDO6/PWM6/PPG6 output PORT00 UART data input 2 TC6 input PORT17 PMD control input W2 PORT16 PMD control input V2 PORT15 PMD control input U2 PORT14 PPG1 output PWM5/PDO5 output PORT13 Divider Output TC5 input PORT12 External interrupt 2 input TC1 input PORT11 External interrupt 1 input PORT10 External interrupt 0 input PORT22 External interrupt 4 input TC4 input PWM4/PDO4 output PORT21 External interrupt 3 input TC3 pin input PORT20 External interrupt 5 input STOP mode release signal input PORT37 PMD over load protection input1 PORT36 PMD emergency stop input1 PORT35 PMD control output U1
P02
HPWM0
63
P01 TXD2
PDO6/PWM6/PPG6
62
P00 RXD2 TC6 P17 PDW2 P16 PDV2 P15 PDU2 P14
PPG1 PWM5/PDO5
61
72
71
70
69
P13
DVO
68
TC5 P12 INT2 TC1 P11 INT1 P10
INT0
67
66
65
P22 INT4 TC4
PWM4/PDO4
7
P21 INT3 TC3 P20
INT5 STOP
6
9
P37
CL1
17
P36
EMG1
16
P35 U1
15
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP88CS43FG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/4)
Pin Name P34 V1 P33 W1 P32 X1 P31 Y1 P30 Z1 P47 CTC P46
PPG2
Pin Number 14
Input/Output IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O I I IO O IO O O IO I I IO IO IO I IO I IO I IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO I IO I IO I O PORT34 PMD control output V1 PORT33 PMD control output W1 PORT32 PMD control output X1 PORT31 PMD control output Y1 PORT30 PMD control output Z1 PORT47 CTC input PORT46 PPG2eooO PORT45 UART data output 1 Serial Data Output PORT44 UART data input 1 Serial Data Input PORT43 Serial Clock I/O PORT42 PMD control input U1 PORT41 PMD control input V1 PORT40 PMD control input W1 PORT57 PMD control output Z2 PORT56 PMD control output Y2 PORT55 PMD control output X2 PORT54 PMD control output W2 PORT53 PMD control output V2 PORT52 PMD control output U2
Functions
13
12
11
10
25
24
P45 TXD1 SO P44 RXD1 SI P43
SCK
23
22
21
P42 PDU1 P41 PDV1 P40 PDW1 P57 Z2 P56 Y2 P55 X2 P54 W2 P53 V2 P52 U2 P51
EMG2
20
19
18
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
PORT51 PMD emergency stop input2 PORT50 PMD over load protection input2 PORT67 Analog Input7 PMD debug output1
P50
CL2
73
P67 AIN7 DBOUT1
33
Page 6
TMP88CS43FG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(3/4)
Pin Name P66 AIN6 P65 AIN5 P64 AIN4 P63 AIN3 P62 AIN2 P61 AIN1 P60 AIN0 P77 AIN15 DBOUT2 P76 AIN14 P75 AIN13 P74 AIN12 P73 AIN11 P72 AIN10 P71 AIN9 P70 AIN8 P87 P86 P85 P84 P83 P82 P81 P80 P97 P96 P95 P94 Pin Number 32 Input/Output IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I O IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO I IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO PORT66 Analog Input6 PORT65 Analog Input5 PORT64 Analog Input4 PORT63 Analog Input3 PORT62 Analog Input2 PORT61 Analog Input1 PORT60 Analog Input0 PORT77 Analog Input15 PMD debug output2 PORT76 Analog Input14 PORT75 Analog Input13 PORT74 Analog Input12 PORT73 Analog Input11 PORT72 Analog Input10 PORT71 Analog Input9 PORT70 Analog Input8 PORT87 PORT86 PORT85 PORT84 PORT83 PORT82 PORT81 PORT80 PORT97 PORT96 PORT95 PORT94 Functions
31
30
29
28
27
26
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 60 59 58 57
Page 7
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP88CS43FG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(4/4)
Pin Name P93 P92 P91 P90 XIN XOUT
RESET
Pin Number 56 55 54 53 2 3 8
Input/Output IO IO IO IO I O I PORT93 PORT92 PORT91 PORT90
Functions
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Reset signal Test pin for out-going test and the Serial PROM mode control pin. Usually fix to low level. Fix to high level when the Serial PROM mode starts. Analog Base Voltage Input Pin for A/D Conversion Analog Power Supply Analog Power Supply +5V 0(GND)
TEST
4
I
VAREF AVDD AVSS VDD VSS
42 43 44 5 1
I I I I I
Page 8
TMP88CS43FG
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core
The CPU core consists mainly of the CPU, system clock control circuit, and interrupt control circuit. This chapter describes the CPU core, program memory, data memory, and reset circuit of the TMP88CS43FG.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The memory of the TMP88CS43FG consists of four blocks: ROM, RAM, SFR (Special Function Registers), and DBR (Data Buffer Registers), which are mapped into one 1-Mbyte address space. The general-purpose registers consist of 16 banks, which are mapped into the RAM address space. Figure 2-1 shows a memory address map of the TMP88CS43FG.
SFR RAM (128 bytes) RAM ( 2K bytes)
008BFH
00000H 0003FH 00040H 000BFH 000C0H
64 bytes 128 bytes
2048 bytes
Special Function Register General-purpose Register Bank (8 registers x 16 banks) Random-Access Memory
DBR
01F80H
128 bytes
01FFFH 04000H
Data Buffer Register (peripheral hardware control register / status register)
65280 bytes
Program Memory
ROM ( 64K Kbytes)
13EFFH
FFF00H FFF3FH FFF40H FFF7FH FFF80H FFFFFH
64 bytes 64 bytes 128 bytes
Interrupt Vector Table Vector Table for Vector Call Instructions Interrupt Vector Table
SFR: Special Function Registers Input/output port Peripheral hardware control register Peripheral hardware status register RAM: Random Access Memory System control register Data memory Interrupt control register Stack Program status word General-purpose register bank ROM: Read-Only Memory Program memory Vector Table
DBR: Data Buffer Registers Input/output port Peripheral hardware control register Peripheral hardware status register
Figure 2-1 Memory address map
Page 9
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core TMP88CS43FG
2.1.2
Program Memory (ROM)
The TMP88CS43FG contains 64Kbytes program memory (MaskROM) located at addresses 04000H to 13EFFH and addresses FFF00H to FFFFFH.
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP88CS43FG contains 2Kbytes +128bytes RAM. The first 128bytes location (00040H to 000BFH) of the internal RAM is shared with a general-purpose register bank. The content of the data memory is indeterminate at power-on, so be sure to initialize it in the initialize routine. Example :Clearing the internal RAM of the TMP88CS43FG (clear all RAM addresses to 0, except bank 0)
LD LD LD SRAMCLR: LD DEC JRS HL, 0048H A, 00H BC, 877H (HL+), A BC F, SRAMCLR ; Set the start address ; Set the initialization data (00H) ; Set byte counts (-1)
Note:Because general-purpose registers exist in the RAM, never clear the current bank address of RAM. In the above example, the RAM is cleared except bank 0.
Page 10
TMP88CS43FG
2.1.4
System Clock Control Circuit
The System Clock Control Circuit consists of a clock generator, timing generator, and standby control circuit.
Timing generator control register Clock generator XIN High-frequency clock oscillator circuit XOUT fc Timing generator Standby control circuit 00038H SYSCR1 System clocks 00039H SYSCR2 TBTCR 00036H
System control register
Figure 2-2 System Clock Control Circuit
2.1.4.1 Clock Generator
The Clock Generator generates the fundamental clock which serves as the reference for the system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware units. The high-frequency clock (frequency fc) can be obtained easily by connecting a resonator to the XIN and XOUT pins. Or a clock generated by an external oscillator can also be used. In this case, enter the external clock from the XIN pin and leave the XOUT pin open. The TMP88CS43FG does not support the CR network that produces a time constant.
High-frequency Clock XIN XOUT XIN XOUT
(Open)
(a) Using a crystal or ceramic resonator
(b) Using an external oscillator
Figure 2-3 Example for Connecting a Resonator
Adjusting the oscillation frequency
Note: Although no hardware functions are provided that allow the fundamental clock to be monitored directly from the outside, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by forwarding the pulse of a fixed frequency (e.g., clock output) to a port and monitoring it in a program while interrupts and the watchdog timer are disabled. For systems that require adjusting the oscillation frequency, an adjustment program must be created beforehand.
2.1.4.2
Timing Generator
The Timing Generator generates various system clocks from the fundamental clock that are supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware units. The Timing Generator has the following functions: Page 11
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core TMP88CS43FG
1. Generate a divider output (DVO) pulse 2. Generate the source clock for the time base timer 3. Generate the source clock for the watchdog timer 4. Generate the internal source clock for the timer counter 5. Generate a warm-up clock when exiting STOP mode (1) Configuration of the Timing Generator The Timing Generator a 3-stage prescaler, 21-stage dividers, and a machine cycle counter. When reset and when entering/exiting STOP mode, the prescaler and dividers are cleared to 0.
Machine cycle counter
DV1CK
Prescaler fc
S A Y B
Selector
Divider
Divider
012
123456
7 8 9 10111213141516171819 2021
Standby control circuit Watchdog timer
Timer counter
Time base timer
Divider Output etc.
Figure 2-4 Configuration of the Timing Generator
Page 12
TMP88CS43FG
Divider Control Register
CGCR (0030H) 7 0 6 0 5 DV1CK 4 3 2 0 1 0 0 0 (Initial value: 000* *000)
DV1CK
Selects input clock to the first divider stage
0: fc/4 1: fc/8
R/W
Note 1: fc: the high-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: The CGCR Register bits 4 and 3 show an indeterminate value when read. Note 3: Be sure to write "0" to CGCR Register bits 7, 6, 2, 1 and 0.
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR (0036H) 7 DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 0 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: Be sure to write "0" to TBTCR Register bit 4.
(2)
Machine cycle Instruction execution and the internal hardware operations are synchronized to the system clocks. The minimum unit of instruction execution is referred to as the "mgmachine cycle". The TLCS870/X series has 15 types of instructions, from 1-cycle instructions which are executed in one machine cycle up to 15-cycle instructions that require a maximum of 15 machine cycles. A machine cycle consists of four states (S0 to S3), with each state comprised of one main system clock cycle.
1/fc Main system clock
States
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle (0.20 s at 20 MHz)
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycles
Page 13
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core TMP88CS43FG
2.1.4.3
Standby Control Circuit
The Standby Control Circuit starts/stops the high-frequency clock oscillator circuit and selects the main system clock. The System Control Registers (SYSCR1, SYSCR2) are used to control operation modes of this circuit. Figure 2-6 shows an operation mode transition diagram, followed by description of the System Control Registers. (1) Single clock mode Only the high-frequency clock oscillator circuit is used. Because the main system clock is generated from the high-frequency clock, the machine cycle time in single clock mode is 4/fc [s]. 1. NORMAL mode In this mode, the CPU core and peripheral hardware units are operated with the high-frequency clock. The TMP88CS43FG enters this NORMAL mode after reset. 2. IDLE mode In this mode, the CPU and watchdog timer are turned off while the peripheral hardware units are operated with the high-frequency clock. IDLE mode is entered into by using System Control Register 2. The device is placed out of this mode and back into NORMAL mode by an interrupt from the peripheral hardware or an external interrupt. When IMF (interrupt master enable flag) = 1 (interrupt enabled), the device returns to normal operation after the interrupt has been serviced. When IMF = 0 (interrupt disabled), the device restarts execution beginning with the instruction next to one that placed it in IDLE mode. 3. STOP mode The entire system operation including the oscillator circuit is halted, retaining the internal state immediately before being stopped, with a minimal amount of power consumed. STOP mode is entered into by using System Control Register 1, and is exited by STOP pin input (level or edge selectable). After an elapse of the warm-up time, the device restarts execution beginning with the instruction next to one that placed it in STOP mode. Table 2-1 Single Clock Mode
Oscillator Circuit Operation Mode High Frequency Low Frequency CPU Core Peripheral Circuit Reset 4/fc [s] Operate Stop STOP Stop Stop Machine Cycle Time
RESET Single Clock NORMAL IDLE Oscillate -
Reset Operate
RESET Reset deasserted Instruction NORMAL mode Interrupt Input for releasing mode STOP mode
Instruction IDLE mode
Figure 2-6 Operation Mode Transition Diagram
Page 14
TMP88CS43FG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1 (0038H) 7 STOP 6 RELM 5 RETM 4 OUTEN 3 WUT 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP
Place the device in STOP mode Select method by which the device is released from STOP mode Select operation mode after exiting STOP mode Select port output state during STOP mode
0: Keep the CPU core and peripheral hardware operating 1: Stop the CPU core and peripheral hardware (placed in STOP mode) 0: Released by a rising edge on STOP pin input 1: Released by a high level on STOP pin input 0: Returns to NORMAL mode 1: Reserved 0: High-impedance state 1: Hold output When Returning to NORMAL Mode DV1CK = 0 DV1CK = 1 3 x 217/fc 217/fc 215/fc Reserved R/W
RELM
RETM OUTEN
WUT
Unit of warm-up time when exiting STOP mode
00 01 10 11
3 x 216/fc 216/fc 214/fc Reserved
Note 1: When entering from NORMAL mode into STOP mode, always be sure to set SYSCR1 to 0. Note 2: When the device is released from STOP mode by RESET pin input, it always returns to NORMAL mode regardless of how SYSCR1 is set. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 4: The values of the SYSCR1 Register bits 1 and 0 are indeterminate when read. Note 5: When placed the device in STOP mode, make sure to set "1" to SYSCR1. Note 6: Releasing the device from the STOP mode causes the STOP bit to be automatically cleared to "0". Note 7: Select an appropriate value for the warm-up time according to the characteristic of the resonator used.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2 (0039H) 7 XEN 6 0 5 SYSCK 4 IDLE 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1000 ****)
XEN SYSCK IDLE
Control high-frequency oscillator Select (write)/monitor (read) system clock Place the device in IDLE mode
0: Stop oscillation 1: Continue or start oscillating 0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL/IDLE) 1: Reserved 0: Keep the CPU and WDT operating 1: Stop the CPU and WDT (IDLE mode entered)
R/W R/W R/W
RETM 0 1
Operation Mode after Releasing STOP Mode NORMAL mode No operation
XEN 1 0
SYSCK 0 1
Note 1: When exiting STOP mode, SYSCR2 are automatically rewritten according to SYSCR1.. Note 2: When SYSCR2is cleared to 0, the device is reset. Note 3: WDT: Watchdog Timer, *: Don't care Note 4: Be sure to write "0" to SYSCR2 Register bit6. Note 5: The values of the SYSCR2 Register bits 3 to 0 are indeterminate when read. Note 6: Change the operation mode after disabling external interrupts. If interrupts are enabled after changing operation mode, clear interrupt latches as appropriate in advance.
Page 15
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core TMP88CS43FG
2.1.4.4
Controlling Operation Modes
(1) STOP mode STOP mode is controlled by System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1) and the STOP pin input. The STOP pin is shared with P20 port and INT5 (external interrupt input 5). STOP mode is entered into by setting STOP (SYSCR1 Register bit 7) to 1. During STOP mode, the device retains the following state. 1. Stop oscillation, thereby stopping operation of all internal circuits. 2. The data memory, register, program status word, and port output latch hold the state in which they were immediately before entering STOP mode. 3. Clear the prescaler and divider for the timing generator to 0. 4. The program counter holds the instruction address two instructions ahead the one that placed the device in STOP mode (e.g., "SET (SYSCR1).7"). The device is released from STOP mode by the active level or edge on STOP pin input as selected by SYSCR1.
Note: Before entering STOP mode, be sure to disable interrupts. This is because if the signal on an external interrupt pin changes state during STOP (from entering STOP mode till completion of warm-up) the interrupt latch is set to 1, so that the device may accept the interrupt immediately after exiting STOP mode. Also, when reenabling interrupts after exiting STOP mode, be sure to clear the unnecessary interrupt latches beforehand.
a. Released by level (when RELM = 1) The device is released from STOP mode by a high level on STOP pin input. Any instruction to place the device in STOP mode is ignored when executed while STOP pin input level is high, and the device immediately goes to a release sequence (warm-up) without entering STOP mode. Therefore, before STOP mode can be entered while RELM = 1, the STOP pin input must be verified to be low in a program. There are following methods to do this verification. 1. Testing the port status 2. INT5 interrupt (interrupt generated at a falling edge on INT5 pin input) Example 1 :Entering STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing P20 port
LD SSTOPH : TEST JRS DI SET (SYSCR1) . 7 (SYSCR1), 01010000B (P2DR) . 0 F, SSTOPH ; IMF 0 ; Place the device in STOP mode ; Select to be released from STOP mode by level ; Wait until STOP pin input goes low
Example 2 :Entering STOP mode from NORMAL mode by INT5 interrupt
PINT5 : TEST (P2DR) . 0 ; Do not enter STOP mode if P20 port input level is high, to eliminate noise ; Do not enter STOP mode if P20 port input level is high, to eliminate noise ; Select to be released from STOP mode by level ; IMF 0 (SYSCR1) . 7 ; Place the device in STOP mode
JRS LD DI SET SINT5 : RETI
F, SINT5 (SYSCR1), 01010000B
Page 16
TMP88CS43FG
STOP pin
VIH
XOUT pin NORMAL operation STOP mode Detect low on STOP pin input in a program before entering STOP mode Warm-up NORMAL operation
Released from STOP mode in hardware Always released by a high level on STOP pin input
Figure 2-7 Released from STOP Mode by Level
Note 1: Once warm-up starts, the device does not return to STOP mode even when the STOP pin input is pulled low again. Note 2: If RELM is changed to 1 (level mode) after being set to 0 (edge mode), STOP mode remains unchanged unless a rising edge on STOP pin input is detected.
a. Released by edge (when RELM = 0) The device is released from STOP mode by a rising edge on STOP pin input. This method is used in applications where a relatively short time of program processing is repeated at certain fixed intervals. Apply a fixed-period signal (e.g., clock from the low-power oscillating source) to the STOP pin. When RELM = 0 (edge mode), the device is placed in STOP mode even when the STOP pin input level is high. Example :Entering STOP mode from NORMAL mode
DI LD (SYSCR1) , 10010000B ; IMF 0 ; Set to be released by edge when entering STOP mode
STOP pin
VIH
XOUT pin NORMAL operation Placed into STOP mode in a program STOP mode Warm-up NORMAL operation STOP mode
Released from STOP mode in hardware by a rising edge on STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Released from STOP Mode by Edge
Page 17
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core TMP88CS43FG
The device is released from STOP mode following the sequence described below. 1. Only the high-frequency oscillator is oscillating. 2. A warm-up time is inserted in order to allow for the clock oscillation to stabilize. During warm-up, the internal circuits remain idle. The warm-up time can be selected from three choices according to the oscillator characteristics by using SYSCR1. 3. After an elapse of the warm-up time, the device restarts normal operation beginning with the instruction next to one that placed it in STOP mode. At this time, the prescaler and divider for the timing generator start from the zero-cleared state. Table 2-2 Warm-up Time (Example: fc = 20 MHz)
Warm-up Time [ms] WUT When Returning to NORMAL Mode DV1CK = 0 00 01 10 11 9.831 3.277 0.819 Reserved DV1CK = 1 19.662 6.554 1.638 Reserved
Note: Because the warm-up time is obtained from the fundamental clock by dividing it, if the oscillation frequency fluctuates while exiting STOP mode, the warm-up time becomes to have some error. Therefore, the warm-up time must be handled as an approximate value.
The device can also be released from STOP mode by pulling the RESET pin input low, in which case the device is immediately reset as is normally reset by RESET. After reset, the device starts operating from NORMAL mode.
Note: When exiting STOP mode while the device is retained at low voltage, the following caution is required. Before exiting STOP mode, the power supply voltage must be raised to the operating voltage. At this time, the RESET pin level also is high and rises along with the power supply voltage. If the device has a time-constant circuit added external to the chip, the voltage on RESET pin input does not rise as fast as the power supply voltage. Therefore, if the voltage level on RESET pin input is below the RESET pin's noninverted, high-level input voltage (hysteresis input), the device may be reset.
Page 18
Oscillator circuit
Oscillation
Stop
Main system clock a+3 Stop
Program counter SET (SYSCR1). 7
a+2
Instruction execution n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4
Divider
n
0
(a) Entering STOP mode (Example: Entered into by the SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction placed at address a)
Figure 2-9 Entering and Exiting STOP Mode (when DV1CK = 0)
a+3 a+4 a+5 a+6 Instruction at address a + 2 Instruction at address a + 3 0 (b) Exiting STOP mode 1 2 3
Page 19
Warm-up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Stop
Oscillation
Main system clock
Program counter
Instruction execution
Stop
Instruction at address a + 4
Divider
0
Count up
TMP88CS43FG
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core TMP88CS43FG
(2)
IDLE mode IDLE mode is controlled by System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) and a maskable interrupt. During IDLE mode, the device retains the following state. 1. The CPU and watchdog timer stop operating. The peripheral hardware continues operating. 2. The data memory, register, program status word, and port output latch hold the state in which they were immediately before entering IDLE mode. 3. The program counter holds the instruction address two instructions ahead the one that placed the device in IDLE mode.
Example :Placing the device in IDLE mode
SET (SYSCR2) . 4
Place the device in IDLE mode (by instruction)
Stop the CPU and WDT
Reset input ? No No
Yes
Reset
Interrupt request ? Yes
No
IMF = 1 Yes (Released by interrupt)
(Released normally)
Interrupt handling
Execute the instruction next to one that placed device IDLE mode
Figure 2-10 IDLE Mode
Page 20
TMP88CS43FG
The device can be released from IDLE mode normally or by an interrupt as selected with the interrupt master enable flag (IMF). a. Released normally (when IMF = 0) The device can be released from IDLE mode by the interrupt source enabled by the interrupt individual enable flag (EF), and restarts execution beginning with the instruction next to one that placed it in IDLE mode. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source used to exit IDLE mode normally needs to be cleared to 0 using a load instruction. b. Released by interrupt (when IMF = 1) The device can be released from IDLE mode by the interrupt source enabled by the interrupt individual enable flag (EF), and enters interrupt handling. After interrupt handling, the device returns to the instruction next to one that placed it in IDLE mode. The device can also be released from IDLE mode by pulling the RESET pin input low, in which case the device is immediately reset as is normally reset by RESET. After reset, the device starts operating from NORMAL mode.
Note: If a watchdog timer interrupt occurs immediately before entering IDLE mode, the device processes the watchdog timer interrupt without entering IDLE mode.
Page 21
Main system clock
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core
Interrupt request a+2 a+3 IDLE
Program counter SET (SYSCR2). 4
Instruction execution Operating
Watchdog timer
(a) Entering IDLE mode (Example: Entered into by the SET instruction placed at address a)
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+3 a+4
Program counter Instruction at address a + 2
Figure 2-11 Entering and Exiting IDLE Mode
Operating a+3 Interrupt accepted Operating
Page 22
Instruction execution
IDLE
Watchdog timer
IDLE
1. Released normally
Main system clock
Interrupt request
Program counter
Instruction execution
IDLE
Watchdog timer
IDLE
2. Released by interrupt
TMP88CS43FG
(b) Exiting IDLE mode
TMP88CS43FG
2.1.5
Reset Circuit
The TMP88CS43FG has four ways to generate a reset: external reset input, address trap reset, watchdog timer reset, or system clock reset. Table 2-3 shows how the internal hardware is initialized by reset operation. At power-on time, the internal cause reset circuits (watchdog timer reset, address trap reset, and system clock reset) are not initialized. Table 2-3 Internal Hardware Initialization by Reset Operation
Internal Hardware Program Counter (PC) Stack Pointer (SP) General-purpose Registers (W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L) Register Bank Selector (RBS) Jump Status Flag (JF) Zero Flag (ZF) Carry Flag (CF) Half Carry Flag (HF) Sign Flag (SF) Overflow Flag (VF) Interrupt Master Enable Flag (IMF) Interrupt Individual Enable Flag (EF) Interrupt Latch (IL) Interrupt Nesting Flag (INF) Initial Value (FFFFEH to FFFFCH) Not initialized Not initialized 0 Watchdog timer 1 Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Output latch of input/output port Not initialized Not initialized 0 0 Control register 0 0 RAM See description of each control register. Not initialized See description of each input/output port. Enable Prescaler and divider for the timing generator 0 Internal Hardware Initial Value
2.1.5.1
External Reset Input
The RESET pin is a hysteresis input with a pull-up resistor included. By holding the RESET pin low for at least three machine cycles (12/fc [s]) or more while the power supply voltage is within the rated operating voltage range and the oscillator is oscillating stably, the device is reset and its internal state is initialized. When the RESET pin input is released back high, the device is freed from reset and starts executing the program beginning with the vector address stored at addresses FFFFCH to FFFFEH.
VDD
RESET
Reset input
Figure 2-12 Reset Circuit
2.1.5.2 Adress Trap Reset
If the CPU should start looping for reasons of noise, etc. and attempts to fetch instructions from the internal RAM,SFR or DBR area, the device generats an internal reset. The addess trap permission/prohibition is set by the address trap reset control register (ATAS,ATKEY). The address trap is permited initially and the internal reset is generated by fetching from internal RAM,SFR or DBR area. If the address trap is prohibited, instructions in the internal RAM area can be executed. Page 23
2. Functional Description
2.1 Functions of the CPU Core TMP88CS43FG
Address Trap Control Register
ATAS (1F94H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ATAS (initial value: **** ***0)
ATAS
Select the address trap permission / prohibition
0: Permit address trap 1: Prohibit address trap (It may be available after setting control code for ATKEY register)
Write only
Address Trap Control Code Register
ATKEY (1F95H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (initial value: **** ****)
ATKEY
Write control code to prohibit address trap
D2H: Address trap prohibition code Others: Ineffective
Write only
Note: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation, cannot access ATAS or ATKEY register because these register are write only. Note 1: In development tools, address trap cannot be prohibited in the internal RAM,SFR or DBR area with the address trap control registers. When using development tools, even if the address trap permission/prohibition setting is changed in the user's program, this change is ineffective. To execute instructions from the RAM area, development tools must be set accordingly. Note 2: While the SWI instruction at an address immediately before the address trap area is executing, the program counter is incremented to point to the next address in the address trap area; an address trap is therefore taken immediately.
Development tool setting * To prohibit the address trap: 1. Modify the iram (mapping attribute) area to (00040H to 000BFH) in the memory map window. 2. Set 000C0H to "address trap prohibition area" as a new eram (mapping attribute) area. 3. Load the user program 4. Execute the address trap prohibition code in the user's program
2.1.5.3
Watchdog Timer Reset
Refer to the Section "Watchdog Timer."
2.1.5.4
System Clock Reset
When SYSCR2 is cleared to 0 or when SYSCR2 is cleared to 0 while SYSCR2 = 0, the system clock is turned off, causing the CPU to become locked up. To prevent this problem, upon detecting SYSCR2 = 0, SYSCR2 = SYSCR2 = 0 or SYSCR2 = 1, the device automatically generates an internal reset signal to let the system clock continue oscillating.
Page 24
TMP88CS43FG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP88CS43FG has a total of 35 interrupt sources excluding reset. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Two of the internal interrupt sources are pseudo nonmaskable while the rest are maskable. Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. The interrupt latch is set to "1" by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Latch - - IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 IL10 IL11 IL12 IL13 IL14 IL15 IL16 IL17 IL18 IL19 IL20 IL21 IL22 IL23 IL24 IL25 IL26 IL27 IL28 IL29 IL30 IL31 IL32 IL33 IL34 IL35 IL36 IL37 IL38 Vector Address FFFFC FFFF8 FFFF4 FFFF0 FFFEC FFFE8 FFFE4 FFFE0 FFFDC FFFD8 FFFD4 FFFD0 FFFCC FFFC8 FFFC4 FFFC0 FFFBC FFFB8 FFFB4 FFFB0 FFFAC FFFA8 FFFA4 FFFA0 FFF9C FFF98 FFF94 FFF90 FFF8C FFF88 FFF84 FFF80 FFF3C FFF38 FFF34 FFF30 FFF2C FFF28 FFF24
Interrupt Factors Internal/External Internal Internal External (Reset) INTSWI (Software interrupt) INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
INT0
Enable Condition Nonmaskable Pseudo nonmaskable Pseudo nonmaskable IMF* EF3 = 1, INT0EN = 1 IMF* EF4 = 1 IMF* EF5 = 1 IMF* EF6 = 1 IMF* EF7 = 1 IMF* EF8 = 1 IMF* EF9 = 1 IMF* EF10 = 1 IMF* EF11 = 1 IMF* EF12 = 1 IMF* EF13 = 1 IMF* EF14 = 1 IMF* EF15 = 1 IMF* EF16 = 1 IMF* EF17 = 1 IMF* EF18 = 1 IMF* EF19 = 1 IMF* EF20 = 1 IMF* EF21 = 1 IMF* EF22 = 1 IMF* EF23 = 1 IMF* EF24 = 1 IMF* EF25 = 1 IMF* EF26 = 1 IMF* EF27 = 1 IMF* EF28 = 1 IMF* EF29 = 1 IMF* EF30 = 1 IMF* EF31 = 1 IMF* EF32 = 1 IMF* EF33 = 1 IMF* EF34 = 1 IMF* EF35= 1 IMF* EF36 = 1 IMF* EF37 = 1 IMF* EF38 = 1
Priority High 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Low 38
(External interrupt 0)
Reserved External Internal INT1 (External interrupt 1) INTTBT (TBT interrupt) Reserved Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal INTEMG1 (ch1 Error detect interrupt) INTEMG2 (ch2 Error detect interrupt) INTCLM1 (ch1 Overload protection interrupt) INTCLM2 (ch2 Overload protection interrupt) INTTMR31 (ch1 Timer 3 interrupt) INTTMR32 (ch2 Timer 3 interrupt) Reserved External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External External External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal
INT5 (External interrupt 5)
INTPDC1 (ch1 Posision detect interrupt) INTPDC2 (ch2 Posision detect interrupt) INTPWM1 (ch1 Waveform generater interrupt) INTPWM2 (ch2 Waveform generater interrupt) INTEDT1 (ch1 Erectric angle Timer interrupt) INTEDT2 (ch2 Erectric angle Timer interrupt) INTTMR11 (ch1 Timer1 interrupt) INTTMR12 (ch2 Timer1 interrupt) INTTMR21 (ch1 Timer2 interrupt) INTTMR22 (ch2 Timer2 interrupt) INTTC1 (TC1 interrupt) INTCTC1 (CTC interrupt) INTTC6 (TC6 8bit/16bit interrupt) INT2 (External interrupt 2) INT3 (External interrupt 3) INT4 (External interrupt 4) INTRXD (UART receive interrupt) INTTXD (UART transmit interrupt) INTSIO (SIO interrupt) INTTC3 (TC3 interrupt) INTTC4 (TC4 interrupt) INTTC5 (TC5 interrupt) INTADC (A/D converter interrupt)
Page 25
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL38 to IL2) TMP88CS43FG
Note 1: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after reset is released). It is described in the section "Watchdog Timer" for details.
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL38 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to "1", and the CPU is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to "0" during reset. The interrupt latches are located on address 003CH, 003DH, 002EH, 002FH and 002BH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 should be set to "1". If the read-modifywrite instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software. But interrupt latches are not set to "1" by an instruction.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
DI LD LD LD LD LD EI (ILL), 1110100000111111B (ILH), 1110100000111111B (ILE), 1110100000111111B (ILD), 1110100000111111B (ILC), 1110100000111111B ; IMF 0 ; IL2 to IL7 0 ; IL8 to IL15 0 ; IL16 to IL23 0 ; IL24 to IL31 0 ; IL32 toIL38 0 ; IMF 1
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latches
LD LD LD WA, (ILL) BC, (ILE) D, (ILC) ; W (ILH), A (ILL) ; B (ILD), C (ILE) ; D (ILC)
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
TEST JR (ILL). 7 F, SSET ; if IL7 = 1 then jump
Page 26
TMP88CS43FG
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the pseudo nonmaskable interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Pseudo non-maskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR. The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These registers are located on address 003AH, 003BH, 002CH, 002DH and 002AH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. While IMF = "0", all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to "1", the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to "0" after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled temporarily. IMF flag is set to "1" by the maskable interrupt return instruction [RETI] after executing the interrupt service program routine, and MCU can accept the interrupt again. The latest interrupt request is generated already, it is available immediately after the [RETI] instruction is executed. On the pseudo non-maskable interrupt, the non-maskable return instruction [RETN] is adopted. In this case, IMF flag is set to "1" only when it performs the pseudo non-maskable interrupt service routine on the interrupt acceptable status (IMF=1). However, IMF is set to "0" in the pseudo non-maskable interrupt service routine, it maintains its status (IMF="0"). The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction. The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to "0".
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF38 to EF3)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to "1" enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to "0" disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF38 to EF3) are initialized to "0" and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to "1".
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
DI SET CLR CLR CLR : EI ; IMF 1 (EIRL), .5 (EIRL), .6 (EIRH), .4 (EIRD), .0 ; IMF 0 ; EF5 1 ; EF6 0 ; EF12 0 ; EF24 0
Page 27
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP88CS43FG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: 0*000000 *00*0000) ILH,ILL (003DH, 003CH) 15 IL15 14 13 IL13 12 IL12 11 IL11 10 IL10 9 IL9 8 IL8 7 6 IL6 5 IL5 4 3 IL3 2 IL2 1 INF 0
ILH (003DH)
ILL (003CH)
(Initial value: 00000000 00000000) ILD,ILE (002FH, 002EH) 15 IL31 14 IL30 13 IL29 12 IL28 11 IL27 10 IL26 9 IL25 8 IL24 7 IL23 6 IL22 5 IL21 4 IL20 3 IL19 2 IL18 1 IL17 0 IL16
ILD (002FH)
ILE (002EH)
(Initial value: *0000000) ILC (002BH) 7 6 IL38 5 IL37 4 IL36 3 IL35 2 IL34 1 IL33 0 IL32
ILE (002BH)
Read IL38 to IL2 Interrupt latches 0: No interrupt request 1: Interrupt request 00: Out of interrupt service 01: On interrupt service of level 1 01: On interrupt service of more than level 2 01: On interrupt service of more than level 3
Write 0: Clears the interrupt request (Note1) 1: (Unable to set interrupt latch) 00: Reserved 01: Clear the nesting counter 10: Count-down 1 step for the nesting counter (Note2) 11: Reserved R/W
INF
Interrupt Nesting Flag
Note 1: IL2 cannot alone be cleard. Note 2: Unable to detect the under-flow of counter. Note 3: The nesting counter is set "0" initially, it performs count-up by the interrupt acceptance and count-down by executing the interrupt return instruction. Note 4: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1". Note 5: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: 0*000000 *00*0**0) EIRH,EIRL (003BH, 003AH) 15 EF15 14 13 EF13 12 EF12 11 EF11 10 EF10 9 EF9 8 EF8 7 6 EF6 5 EF5 4 3 EF3 2 1 0 IMF
EIRH (003BH)
EIRL (003AH)
(Initial value: 00000000 00000000) EIRD,EIRE (002DH, 002CH) 15 EF31 14 EF30 13 EF29 12 EF28 11 EF27 10 EF26 9 EF25 8 EF24 7 EF23 6 EF22 5 EF21 4 EF20 3 EF19 2 EF18 1 EF17 0 EF16
EIRD (002DH)
EIRE (002CH)
(Initial value: *0000000) EIRE (002AH) 7 6 EF38 5 EF37 4 EF36 3 EF35 2 EF34 1 EF33 0 EF32
EIRE (002AH)
Page 28
TMP88CS43FG
EF38 to EF3 IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag (Specified for each bit) Interrupt master enable flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF38 to EF3) to "1" at the same time. Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 29
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence TMP88CS43FG
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to "0" by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 12 machine cycles (2.4 s @20 MHz) after the completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.3.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to "0" in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt. b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to "0". c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSWH, PSWL, PCE, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 5. d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter. e. Read the RBS control code from the vector table, add its MSB(4bit) to the register bank selecter (RBS). f. Count up the interrupt nesting counter. g. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
Interrupt service task 1-machine cycle Interrupt request Interrupt latch (IL) IMF Execute instruction PC Execute instruction a-1 a a+1
Execute instruction
Interrupt acceptance
Execute RETI instruction
a
b
b+1 b+2 b+3
c+1
c+2
a
a+1 a+2
SP
n
n-1 n-2 n-3 n-4
n-5
n-4 n-3 n-2 n-1
n
Note 1: a: Return address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 62/fc [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 15 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt service program
Page 30
TMP88CS43FG
Vector table address
Entry address
FFFE4H FFFE5H FFFE6H FFFE7H
45H 23H 01H 06H RBS control code Vector
12345H 12346H 12347H 12348H Interrupt service program
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to "1" even if the maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to "1" in the interrupt service program. In this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags. But don't use the read-modify-write instruction for EIRL(0003AH) on the pseudo non-maskable interrupt service task. To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting IMF to "1". As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested.
3.3.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. The following four methods are used to save/restore the general-purpose registers.
3.3.2.1
Using Automatic register bank switcing
By switching to non-use register bank, it can restore the general-purpose register at hige speed. Usually the bank register "0" is assigned for main task and the bank register "1 to 15" are for the each interrupt service task. To make up its data memory efficiency, the common bank is assigned for non-multiple intrrupt factor. It can return back to main-flow by executing the interrupt return instructions ([RETI]/[RETN]) from the current interrupt register bank automatically. Thus, no need to restore the RBS by a program.
Example :Register bank switching
PINTxx: (interrupt processing) RETI : VINTxx: DP DB PINTxx 1 ; PINTxx vector address setting ; RBS <- RBS + 1 RBS setting on PINTxx ; Begin of interrupt routine ; End of interrupt
3.3.2.2
Using register bank switching
By switching to non-use register bank, it can restore the general-purpose register at hige speed. Usually the bank register "0" is assigned for main task and the bank register "1 to 15" are for the each interrupt service task. Page 31
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence TMP88CS43FG
Example :Register bank switching
PINTxx: LD RBS, n ; RBS <- n Begin of interrupt routine (interrupt processing) RETI : VINTxx: DP DB PINTxx 0 ; PINTxx vector address setting ; RBS <- RBS + 0 RBS setting on PINTxx ; End of interrupt , restore RBS and interrupt return
3.3.2.3
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx: PUSH WA ; Save WA register (interrupt processing) POP RETI WA ; Restore WA register ; RETURN
Address (Example) SP A SP PCL PCH PSWL PSWH At acceptance of an interrupt W PCL PCH PSWL PSWH At execution of PUSH instruction SP PCL PCH PSWL PSWH At execution of POP instruction SP b-5 b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b At execution of RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.3.2.4 Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx: LD (GSAVA), A ; Save A register (interrupt processing) LD RETI A, (GSAVA) ; Restore A register ; Return
Page 32
TMP88CS43FG
Main task Bank m
Interrupt acceptance
Main task
Interrupt service task
Bank m
Interrupt acceptance
Switch to bank n by LD, RBS and n instruction Switch to bank n automatically
Interrupt service task
Saving registers
Bank n
Bank m
Interrupt return
Restore to bank m automatically by [RETI]/[RETN]
Restoring registers
Interrupt return
(a) Saving/restoring by register bank changeover
(b) Saving/restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing 3.3.3 Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI] Maskable Interrupt Return 1. The contents of the program counter and the program status word are restored from the stack. 2. The stack pointer is incremented 5 times. 3. The interrupt master enable flag is set to "1". 4. The interrupt nesting counter is decremented, and the interrupt nesting flag is changed. [RETN] Non-maskable Interrupt Return 1. The contents of the program counter and the program status word are restored from the stack. 2. The stack pointer is incremented 5 times. 3. The interrupt master enable flag is set to "1" only when a non-maskable interrupt is accepted in interrupt enable status. However, the interrupt master enable flag remains at "0" when so clear by an interrupt service program. 4. The interrupt nesting counter is decremented, and the interrupt nesting flag is changed.
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Note: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task.
Page 33
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW) TMP88CS43FG
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW is highest prioritized interrupt). However, if processing of a non-maskable inerrupt is already underway, executing the SWI instruction will not generate a software interrupt but will result in the same operation as the NOP instruction. Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.4.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.4.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting address.
Page 34
TMP88CS43FG
3.5 External Interrupts
The TMP88CS43FG has 6 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise). Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT4. The INT0/P10 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. Edge selection, and noise reject control and INT0/P10 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (EINTCR).
Source INT0 Pin
INT0
Sub-Pin P10 IMF
Enable Conditions EF3 INT0EN=1
Release Edge (level) Falling edge
Digital Noise Reject Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 6/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. (at CGCR=0). Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 48/fc or 192/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. (at CGCR=0).
INT1
INT1
P11
IMF
EF5 = 1
INT2 INT3 INT4
INT2 INT3 INT4
P12/TC1 P21/TC3 P22/TC4
IMF IMF IMF
EF29 = 1 EF30 = 1 EF31 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 24/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals.(at CGCR=0).
INT5
INT5
P20/STOP
IMF
EF15 = 1
Falling edge
Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 6/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals.
Note 1: In NORMAL or IDLE mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. (1) INT1 pin 49/fc [s] ( at EINTCR = "1") , 193/fc [s] ( at EINTCR = "0") (2) INT2 to INT4 pins 25/fc [s] Note 2: When EINTCR = "0", IL3 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input. Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.5 External Interrupts TMP88CS43FG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR (0037H) 7 INT1NC 6 INT0EN 5 INT4ES 4 3 INT3ES 2 INT2ES 1 INT1ES 0 (Initial value: 0000 000*)
INT1NC INT0EN
Noise reject time select P10/INT0 pin configuration
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 0: P10 input/output port 1: INT0 pin (Port P10 should be set to an input mode) 00: Rising edge 01: Falling edge 10: Rising edge and Falling edge 11: H level 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
R/W R/W
INT4 ES
INT4 edge select
R/W
INT3 ES INT2 ES INT1 ES
INT3 edge select INT2 edge select INT1 edge select R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When the external interrupt control register (EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR). Note 3: The maximum time from modifying EINTCR until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc. Note 4: In case RESET pin is released while the state of INT4 pin keeps "H" level, the external interrupt 4 request is not generated even if the INT4 edge select(EINTCR) is specified as "H" level. The rising edge is needed after RESET pin is released.
Page 36
TMP88CS43FG
4. Special Function Register
The TMP88CS43FG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and transfers are performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 1F80H to 1FFFH. This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for TMP88CS43FG.
4.1 SFR
Address 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0010H 0011H 0012H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001EH 001FH 0020H 0021H 0022H 0023H 0024H 0025H TC3DRB TC3CR Reserved TC5CR TC6CR TTREG5 TTREG6 PWREG5 PWREG6 Reserved Reserved TC4CR TC4DR TC3DRA Read P0DR P1DR P2DR P3DR P4DR P5DR P6DR P7DR P8DR P9DR P0CR P1CR HPWMCR HPWMDR0 HPWMDR1 TC1CR TC1DRAL TC1DRAH TC1DRBL TC1DRBH CTC1CR1 CTC1CR2 CTC1DRL TC3DRB Write
Page 37
4. Special Function Register
4.1 SFR TMP88CS43FG
Address 0026H 0027H 0028H 0029H 002AH 002BH 002CH 002DH 002EH 002FH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0033H 0034H 0035H 0036H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH 003DH 003EH 003FH
Read ADCCRA ADCCRB ADCDRL ADCDRH EIRC ILC EIRE EIRD ILE ILD
Write
-
Reserved Reserved Reserved TBTCR EINTCR WDTCR1 WDTCR2
EIRL EIRH ILL ILH
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 38
TMP88CS43FG
4.2 DBR
Address 1F80H 1F81H 1F82H 1F83H 1F84H 1F85H 1F86H 1F87H 1F88H 1F89H 1F8AH 1F8BH 1F8CH 1F8DH 1F8EH 1F8FH 1F90H 1F91H 1F92H 1F93H 1F94H 1F95H 1F96H 1F97H 1F98H 1F99H 1F9AH 1F9BH 1F9CH 1F9DH 1F9EH 1F9FH 1FA0H 1FA1H 1FA2H 1FA3H 1FA4H 1FA5H 1FA6H 1FA7H 1FA8H 1FA9H 1FAAH 1FABH 1FACH 1FADH 1FAEH 1FAFH for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 MCAPL MCAPH CMP1L CMP1H CMP2L CMP2H CMP3L CMP3H MDCRA MDCRB PDCRC SDREG MTCRA MTCRB - - UARTSR - RDBUF - - - SIOSR SIOBR0 SIOBR1 SIOBR2 SIOBR3 SIOBR4 SIOBR5 SIOBR6 SIOBR7 PDCRA PDCRB - PMD ch Read P0ODE - - P3ODE P4ODE P5ODE P8ODE P9ODE - P3CR P4CR P5CR P6CR P7CR P8CR P9CR UARTSEL UARTCRA UARTCRB TDBUF ATAS ATKEY SIOCR1 SIOCR2 Write
Page 39
4. Special Function Register
4.2 DBR TMP88CS43FG
Address 1FB0H 1FB1H 1FB2H 1FB3H 1FB4H 1FB5H 1FB6H 1FB7H 1FB8H 1FB9H 1FBAH 1FBBH 1FBCH 1FBDH 1FBEH 1FBFH 1FC0H 1FC1H 1FC2H 1FC3H 1FC4H 1FC5H 1FC6H 1FC7H 1FC8H 1FC9H 1FCAH 1FCBH 1FCCH 1FCDH 1FCEH 1FCFH 1FD0H 1FD1H 1FD2H 1FD3H 1FD4H 1FD5H 1FD6H 1FD7H 1FD8H 1FD9H 1FDAH 1FDBH 1FDCH 1FDDH 1FDEH 1FDFH 1FE0H 1FE1H 1FE2H
PMD ch for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1 for PMD ch.1
Read EMGCRA EMGCRB MDOUTL MDOUTH MDCNTL MDCNTH MDPRDL MDPRDH CMPUL CMPUH CMPVL CMPVH CMPWL CMPWH DTR - EDCRA EDCRB EDSETL EDSETH ELDEGL ELDEGH AMPL AMPH EDCAPL EDCAPH - - Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
- -
EMGREL
- - WFMDR
for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 MCAPL MCAPH PDCRC
PDCRA PDCRB - SDREG MTCRA MTCRB - - CMP1L CMP1H CMP2L CMP2H CMP3L CMP3H MDCRA MDCRB EMGCRA EMGCRB MDOUTL
Page 40
TMP88CS43FG
Address 1FE3H 1FE4H 1FE5H 1FE6H 1FE7H 1FE8H 1FE9H 1FEAH 1FEBH 1FECH 1FEDH 1FEEH 1FEFH 1FF0H 1FF1H 1FF2H 1FF3H 1FF4H 1FF5H 1FF6H 1FF7H 1FF8H 1FF9H 1FFAH 1FFBH 1FFCH 1FFDH 1FFEH 1FFFH
PMD ch for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2 for PMD ch.2
Read MDOUTH MDCNTL MDCNTH MDPRDL MDPRDH CMPUL CMPUH CMPVL CMPVH CMPWL CMPWH DTR - EDCRA EDCRB EDSETL EDSETH ELDEGL ELDEGH AMPL AMPH EDCAPL EDCAPH - - Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
- -
EMGREL
- - WFMDR
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 41
4. Special Function Register
4.2 DBR TMP88CS43FG
Page 42
TMP88CS43FG
5. Input/Output Ports
The TMP88CS43FG contains 10 input/output ports comprised of 71 pins.
Primary Function Port P0 Port P1 Port P2 Port P3 Port P4 Port P5 Port P6 Port P7 Port P8 Port P9 4-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 3-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port Secondary Functions Timer/counter input, serial interface input/output, and high-speed PWM output External interrupt input, timer/counter input/output, divider output, and motor control circuit input External interrupt input, timer/counter input/output, and STOP mode release signal input Motor control input/output Timer/counter output, serial interface input/output, motor control circuit input Motor control circuit input/output Analog input and motor control circuit output Analog input and motor control circuit output
All output ports contain a latch, and the output data therefore are retained by the latch. But none of the input ports have a latch, so it is desirable that the input data be retained externally until it is read out, or read several times before being processed. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timing. The timing at which external data is read in from input/output ports is S1 state in the read cycle of instruction execution. Because this timing cannot be recognized from the outside, transient input data such as chattering needs to be dealt with in a program. The timing at which data is forwarded to input/output ports is S2 state in the write cycle of instruction execution.
Fetch cycle S0 Instruction execution cycle S1 S2 S3 Fetch cycle S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 Read cycle S1 S2 S3
Example: LD A, (x)
Input strobe
Data input (a) Input timing
Fetch cycle S0 Instruction execution cycle S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle S0 S1 S2 S3 (x), A S0
Write cycle S1 S2 S3
Example: LD
Output latch pulse
Data output
(b) Output timing
Note: The read/write cycle positions vary depending on instructions.
Figure 5-1 Example of Input/Output Timing
When an operation is performed for read from any input/output port except programmable input/output ports, whether the input value of the pin or the content of the output latch is read depends on the instruction executed, as shown below. Page 43
5. Input/Output Ports
TMP88CS43FG
1. Instructions which read the content of the output latch - XCH r, (src) - SET/CLR/CPL (src).b - SET/CLR/CPL (pp).g - LD (src).b, CF - LD (pp).b, CF - XCH CF, (src). b - ADD/ADDC/SUB/SUBB/AND/OR/XOR - ADD/ADDC/SUB/SUBB/AND/OR/XOR - MXOR (src), m 2. Instructions which read the input value of the pin Any instructions other than those listed above and ADD/ADDC/SUB/SUBB/AND/OR/XOR (src),(HL) instructions, the (HL) side thereof (src), n (src), (HL) instructions, the (src) side thereof
Page 44
TMP88CS43FG
5.1 Port P0 (P03 to P00)
Port P0 is a 4-bit input/output port shared with serial interface input/output. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P0 port input/output control register (P0CR). When reset, the P0CR register is initialized to 0, with the P0 port set for input mode. Also, the output latch (P0DR) is initialized to 0 when reset. The P0 port contains bitwise programmable open-drain control. The P0 port open-drain control register (P0ODE) is used to select open-drain or tri-state mode for the port. When reset, the P0ODE register is initialized to 0, with tristate mode selected for the port.
P0CRi Data input Data output Control output Control input DQ Output latch
CR 01 External 0 0 0 input 1 1 0 P0i Control input values Note: i = 3 to 0
Figure 5-2 Port P0
P0 Port Input/Output Registers
7 P0DR (00000H) 6 5 4 3 P03
HPWM1
2 P02
HPWM0
1 P01 TC6O TXD2 1
0 P00 TC6I RXD2 0 (Initial value: **** 0000) Read/Write (Initial value: **** 0000) TC6O: PDO6, PWM6, PPG6
P0CR (0000AH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
P0CR
P0 port input/output control (Specify bitwise)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P0ODE (01F80H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: **** 0000)
P0ODE
P0 port open-drain control (Specify bitwise)
0: Tri-state 1: Open-drain
R/W
Note 1: Even when open-drain mode is selected, the protective diode remains connected. Therefore, do not apply voltages exceeding VDD. Note 2: Read-Modify-Write (RMW) operation executes at open-drain mode is selected, read out the output latch states. When any other instruction is executed, external pin states is read out. Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 45
5. Input/Output Ports
TMP88CS43FG
5.2 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port shared with external interrupt input, timer/counter input/output, and divider output. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P1 port input/output control register (P1CR). When reset, the P1CR register is initialized to 0, with the P1 port set for input mode. Also, the output latch (P1DR) is initialized to 0 when reset.
P1CRi Data input Data output Control output Control input DQ Output latch
CR 01 External 0 0 0 input 1 1 0 P1i Control input values Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-3 Port P1
P1 Port Input/Output Registers
7 P1DR (00001H) P17 PDW2 7 6 P16 PDV2 6 5 P15 PDU2 5 4 P14
PPG1
3 P13
DVO
2 P12 INT2 TC1 2
1 P11 INT1 1
0 P10
INT0
TC5O P1CR (0000BH) 4
TC5I 3
Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000) TC5O: PDO5, PWM5
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR
P1 port input/output control (Specify bitwise)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Page 46
TMP88CS43FG
5.3 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port shared with external interrupt input and STOP mode release signal. When using this port as these functional pins or an input port, set the output latch to 1. When reset, the output latch is initialized to 1. We recommend using the P20 pin as external interrupt input, STOP mode release signal input, or input port. When using this port as an output port, note that the interrupt latch is set by a falling edge of output pulse. And note that outputs on this port during STOP mode go to a high-impedance state even if SYSCR1 is set "1" , because P20 port is also used as STOP port. When a read instruction is executed on P2 port, indeterminate values are read in from bits 7 to 3. When any read-modify-write instruction is executed on P2 port, the content of the output latch is read out. When any other instruction is executed, the external pin state is read out.
SET/CLR/CPL, etc Data input Data output Control input DQ Output latch
CMP/MCMP/TEST, etc
P20, P21, P22
Figure 5-4 Port P2
P2 Port Input/Output Registers
7 P2DR (00002H) 6 5 4 3 2 P22 TC4 INT4
PWM4 PDO4
1 P21 TC3 INT3
0 P20
INT5 STOP
Read/Write (Initial value: **** *111)
Note 1: When a read instruction is executed on P2 port, indeterminate values are read in from bits 7 to 3. Note 2: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, SYSCR1 does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode. Note 3: *: Don't care
Page 47
5. Input/Output Ports
TMP88CS43FG
5.4 Port P3 (P37 to P30)
Port P3 is an 8-bit input/output port. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P3 port Input/ output Control Register (P3CR). When reset, the P3CR Register is initialized to 0, with the P3 port set for input mode. Also, the Output Latch (P3DR) is initialized to 0 when reset. The P3 port contains bitwise programmable open-drain control. The P3 Port Open-drain Control Register (P3ODE) is used to select open-drain or tri-state mode for the port. When reset, the P3ODE Register is initialized to 0, with tri-state mode selected for the port.
P3CRi Data input Data output Control output Control input DQ Output latch
CR 01 External 0 0 0 input 1 1 0 P3i Control input values Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-5 Port P3
P3 Port Input/Output Registers
P3DR (00003H) P3CR (01F89H) 7 P37
CL1
6 P36
EMG1
5 P35 U1 5
4 P34 V1 4
3 P33 W1 3
2 P32 X1 2
1 P31 Y1 1
0 P30 Z1 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
7
6
P3CR
P3 port input/output control (Specify bitwise)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P3ODE (01F83H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P3ODE
P3 port open-drain control (Specify bitwise)
0: Tri-state 1: Open-drain
R/W
Note 1: Even when open-drain mode is selected, the protective diode remains connected. Therefore, do not apply voltages exceeding VDD. Note 2: Read-Modify-Write (RMW) operation executes at open-drain mode is selected, read out the output latch states. When any other instruction is executed, external pin states is read out. Note 3: For PMD circuit output, set the P3DR output latch to 1. Note 4: When using P3 port as an input/output port, disable the EMG1 circuit.
Page 48
TMP88CS43FG
5.5 Port P4 (P47 to P40)
Port P4 is an 8-bit input/output port shared with serial interface input/output. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P4 port input/output control register (P4CR). When reset, the P4CR register is initialized to 0, with the P4 port set for input mode. Also, the output latch (P4DR) is initialized to 0 when reset. The P4 port contains bitwise programmable open-drain control. The P4 port open-drain control register (P4ODE) is used to select open-drain or tri-state mode for the port. When reset, the P4ODE register is initialized to 0, with tristate mode selected for the port.
P4CRi Data input Data output Control output Control input DQ Output latch
CR 01 External 0 0 0 input 1 1 0 P4i Control input values Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-6 Port P4
P4 Port Input/Output Registers
7 P4DR (00004H) P47 CTC 7 6 P46
PPG2
5 P45 SO TXD1 5
4 P44 SI RXD1 4
3 P43 SCK 3
2 P42 PDU1 2
1 P41 PDV1 1
0 P40 PDW1 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4CR (01F8AH)
6
P4CR
P4 port input/output control (Specify bitwise)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P4ODE (01F84H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4ODE
P4 port open-drain control (Specify bitwise)
0: Tri-state 1: Open-drain
R/W
Note 1: Even when open-drain mode is selected, the protective diode remains connected. Therefore, do not apply voltages exceeding VDD. Note 2: Read-Modify-Write (RMW) operation executes at open-drain mode is selected, read out the output latch states. When any other instruction is executed, external pin states is read out. Note 3: When using the 16-bit timer (CTC) as an ordinary timer, set P47 (CTC) for output mode.
Page 49
5. Input/Output Ports
TMP88CS43FG
5.6 Port P5 (P57 to P50)
Port P5 is an 8-bit input/output port. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P5 port input/ output control register (P5CR). When reset, the P5CR register is initialized to 0, with the P5 port set for input mode. Also, the output latch (P5DR) is initialized to 0 when reset. The P5 port contains bitwise programmable open-drain control. The P5 port open-drain control register (P5ODE) is used to select open-drain or tri-state mode for the port. When reset, the P5ODE register is initialized to 0, with tristate mode selected for the port.
P5CRi Data input Data output Control output Control input DQ Output latch
CR 01 External 0 0 0 input 1 1 0 P5i Control input value Note: i = 7 to 0
Figure 5-7 Port P5
P5 Port Input/Output Registers
P5DR (00005H) P5CR (01F8BH) 7 P57 Z2 7 6 P56 Y2 6 5 P55 X2 5 4 P54 W2 4 3 P53 V2 3 2 P52 U2 2 1 P51
EMG2
0 P50
CL2
Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5CR
P5 port input/output control (Specify bitwise)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P5ODE (01F85H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5ODE
P5 port open-drain control (Specify bitwise)
0: Tri-state 1: Open-drain
R/W
Note 1: Even when open-drain mode is selected, the protective diode remains connected. Therefore, do not apply voltages exceeding VDD. Note 2: Read-Modify-Write (RMW) operation executes at open-drain mode is selected, read out the output latch states. When any other instruction is executed, external pin states is read out. Note 3: For PMD circuit output, set the P5DR output latch to 1. Note 4: When using P5 port as an input/output port, disable the EMG2 circuit.
Page 50
TMP88CS43FG
5.7 Port P6 (P67 to P60)
Port P6 is an 8-bit input/output port shared with AD converter analog input. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P6 port input/output control register (P6CR), P6 port output latch (P6DR), and ADCCRA. When reset, the P6CR Register and the P6DR output latch are initialized to 0 while ADCCRA is set to 1, so that P67 to P60 have their inputs fixed low (= 0). When using the P6 port as an input port, set the corresponding bits for input mode (P6CR = 0, P6DR = 1). The reason why the output latch = 1 is because it is necessary to prevent current from flowing into the shared data input circuit. When using the port as an output port, set the P6CR Register's corresponding bits to 1. When using the port for analog input, set the corresponding bits for analog input (P6CR = 0, P6DR = 0). Then set ADCCRA = 0, and AD conversion will start. The ports used for analog input must have their output latches set to 0 beforehand. The actual input channels for AD conversion are selected using ADCCRA. Although the bits of P6 port not used for analog input can be used as input/output ports, do not execute output instructions on these ports during AD conversion. This is necessary to maintain the accuracy of AD conversion. Also, do not apply rapidly changing signals to ports adjacent to analog input during AD conversion. If an input instruction is executed while the P6DR output latch is cleared to 0, data "0" is read in from said bits.
Analog input AINDS SAIN P6CRi P6CRi input Data input (P6) Data output (P6) STOP D Q P6i Note 1: i = 7 to 0 Note 2: STOP exists in SYSCR1 register bit 7. Note 3: SAIN selects AD input channels. D Q
Figure 5-8 Port P6
Page 51
5. Input/Output Ports
TMP88CS43FG
P6 Port Input/Output Registers
7 P6DR (00006H) P67 AIN7 DBOUT1 7 6 P66 AIN6 6 5 P65 AIN5 5 4 P64 AIN4 4 3 P63 AIN3 3 2 P62 AIN2 2 1 P61 AIN1 1 0 P60 AIN0 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P6CR (01F8CH)
AINDS = 1 (when not using AD) P6 port input/output control (Specify bitwise) P6DR = "0" 0 1 Inputs fixed to 0 P6DR = "1" Input mode
AINDS = 0 (when using AD) P6DR = "0" Analog Input mode (Note2) P6DR = "1" Input mode R/W
P6CR
Output mode
Note 1: The pins used for analog input cannot be set for output mode (P6CR = 1) because they become shorted with external signals. Note 2: When a read instruction is executed on bits of this port which are set for analog input mode, data "0" is read in. Note 3: For DBOUT1 output, set the P6DR (P67) output latch to 1. Note 4: When using this port in input mode (including analog input), do not use bit manipulating or other read-modify-write instructions. When a read instruction is executed on the bits of this port that are set for input, the contents of the pins are read in, so that if a read-modify-write instruction is executed, their output latches may be rewritten, making the pins unable to accept input. (A read-modify-write instruction first reads data from all of the eight bits and after modifying them (bit manipulation), writes data for all of the eight bits to the output latches.)
Page 52
TMP88CS43FG
5.8 Port P7 (P77 to P70)
Port P7 is an 8-bit input/output port shared with AD converter analog input. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P7 port input/output control register (P7CR), P7 port output latch (P7DR), and ADCCRA. When reset, the P7CR register and the P7DR output latch are initialized to 0 while ADCCRA is set to 1, so that P77 to P70 have their inputs fixed low (= 0). When using the P7 port as an input port, set the corresponding bits for input mode (P7CR = 0, P7DR = 1). The reason why the output latch = 1 is because it is necessary to prevent current from flowing into the shared data input circuit. When using the port as an output port, set the P7CR Register's corresponding bits to 1. When using the port for analog input, set the corresponding bits for analog input (P7CR = 0, P7DR = 0). Then set ADCCRA = 0, and AD conversion will start. The ports used for analog input must have their output latches set to 0 beforehand. The actual input channels for AD conversion are selected using ADCCRA. Although the bits of P7 port not used for analog input can be used as input/output ports, do not execute output instructions on these ports during AD conversion. This is necessary to maintain the accuracy of AD conversion. Also, do not apply rapidly changing signals to ports adjacent to analog input during AD conversion. If an input instruction is executed while the P7DR output latch is cleared to 0, data "0" is read in from said bits.
Analog input AINDS SAIN P7CRi P7CRi input Data input (P7) Data output (P7) STOP D Q P7i Note 1: i = 7 to 0 Note 2: STOP exists in SYSCR1 register bit 7. Note 3: SAIN selects AD input channels. D Q
Figure 5-9 Port P7
Page 53
5. Input/Output Ports
TMP88CS43FG
P7 Port Input/Output Registers
7 P7DR (00007H) P77 AIN15 DBOUT2 7 6 P76 AIN14 6 5 P75 AIN13 5 4 P74 AIN12 4 3 P73 AIN11 3 2 P72 AIN10 2 1 P71 AIN9 1 0 P70 AIN8 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7CR (01F8DH)
AINDS = 1 (when not using AD) P7 port input/output control (Specify bitwise) P7DR = "0" 0 1 Inputs fixed to 0 P7DR = "1" Input mode
AINDS = 0 (when using AD) P7DR = "0" Analog Input mode (Note2) P7DR = "1" Input mode R/W
P7CR
Output mode
Note 1: The pins used for analog input cannot be set for output mode (P7CR = 1) because they become shorted with external signals. Note 2: When a read instruction is executed on bits of this port which are set for analog input mode, data "0" is read in. Note 3: For DBOUT2 output, set the P7DR (P77) output latch to 1. Note 4: When using this port in input mode (including analog input), do not use bit manipulating or other read-modify-write instructions. When a read instruction is executed on the bits of this port that are set for input, the contents of the pins are read in, so that if a read-modify-write instruction is executed, their output latches may be rewritten, making the pins unable to accept input. (A read-modify-write instruction first reads data from all of the eight bits and after modifying them (bit manipulation), writes data for all of the 8 bits to the output latches.)
Page 54
TMP88CS43FG
5.9 Port P8 (P87 to P80)
Port P8 is an 8-bit input/output port. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P8 port input/ output control register (P8CR). When reset, the P8CR register is initialized to 0, with the P8 port set for input mode. Also, the output latch (P8DR) is initialized to 0 when reset. The P8 port contains bitwise programmable open-drain control. The P8 port open-drain control register (P8ODE) is used to select open-drain or tri-state mode for the port. When reset, the P8ODE register is initialized to 0, with tristate mode selected for the port.
P8CRi Data input Data output DQ Output latch
Figure 5-10 Port P8
P8i Note: i = 7 to 0
P8 Port Input/Output Registers
P8DR (00008H) P8CR (01F8EH) 7 P87 7 6 P86 6 5 P85 5 4 P84 4 3 P83 3 2 P82 2 1 P81 1 0 P80 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P8CR
P8 port input/output control (Specify bitwise)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P8ODE (01F86H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P8ODE
P8 port open-drain control (Specify bitwise)
0: Tri-state 1: Open-drain
R/W
Note 1: Even when open-drain mode is selected, the protective diode remains connected. Therefore, do not apply voltages exceeding VDD. Note 2: Read-Modify-Write (RMW) operation executes at open-drain mode is selected, read out the output latch states. When any other instruction is executed, external pin states is read out.
Page 55
5. Input/Output Ports
TMP88CS43FG
5.10 Port P9 (P97 to P90)
Port P9 is an 8-bit input/output port. This port is switched between input and output modes using the P9 port input/ output control register (P9CR). When reset, the P9CR register is initialized to 0, with the P9 port set for input mode. Also, the output latch (P9DR) is initialized to 0 when reset. The P9 port contains bitwise programmable open-drain control. The P9 port open-drain control register (P9ODE) is used to select open-drain or tri-state mode for the port. When reset, the P9ODE register is initialized to 0, with tristate mode selected for the port.
P9CRi Data input Data output DQ Output latch
Figure 5-11 Port P9
P9i Note: i = 7 to 0
P9 Port Input/Output Registers
P9DR (00009H) P9CR (01F8FH) 7 P97 7 6 P96 6 5 P95 5 4 P94 4 3 P93 3 2 P92 2 1 P91 1 0 P90 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P9CR
P9 port input/output control (Specify bitwise)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
P9ODE (01F87H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P9ODE
P9 port open-drain control (Specify bitwise)
0: Tri-state 1: Open-drain
R/W
Note 1: Even when open-drain mode is selected, the protective diode remains connected. Therefore, do not apply voltages exceeding VDD. Note 2: Read-Modify-Write (RMW) operation executes at open-drain mode is selected, read out the output latch states. When any other instruction is executed, external pin states is read out.
Page 56
TMP88CS43FG
6. Time Base Timer (TBT) and Divider Output (DVO)
6.1 Time Base Timer
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base timer interrupt (INTTBT). An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider output of the timing generator which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled. The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( Figure 6-2 ). The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disble from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
MPX
fc/223,fc/224 fc/221,fc/222 fc/216,fc/217 fc/214,fc/215 fc/213,fc/214 fc/212,fc/213 fc/211,fc/212 fc/29,fc/210
Source clock
Falling edge detector INTTBT interrupt request
3 TBTCK TBTCR Time base timer control register TBTEN
Figure 6-1 Time Base Timer configuration
Source clock
TBTCR
INTTBT interrupt request Interrupt period Enable TBT
Figure 6-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD LD DI SET EI (EIRL) . 6 (TBTCR) , 00000010B (TBTCR) , 00001010B ; TBTCK 010 (Freq. set) ; TBTEN 1 (TBT enable)
Page 57
6. Time Base Timer (TBT) and Divider Output (DVO)
6.1 Time Base Timer TMP88CS43FG
Time Base Timer is controled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (00036H) (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 0 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial Value: 0000 0000)
TBTEN
Time Base Timer Enable / Disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL, IDLE Mode DV1CK=0 000 001 fc/2
23
DV1CK=1 fc/224 fc/222 fc/217 fc/215 fc/214 fc/213 fc/212 fc/210 R/W
fc/221 fc/216 fc/214 fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/29
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt Frequency select : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 2: Always set "0" in bit4 on TBTCR register.
Table 6-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 20.0 MHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz] TBTCK NORMAL, IDLE Mode DV1CK = 0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 2.38 9.53 305.18 1220.70 2441.40 4882.83 9765.63 39063.00 DV1CK = 1 1.20 4.78 153.50 610.35 1220.70 2441.40 4882.83 19531.25
Page 58
TMP88CS43FG
6.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
Output latch Data output D Q DVO pin
fc/213,fc/214 fc/212,fc/213 fc/211,fc/212 fc/210,fc/211
MPX A B CY D S 2 DVOCK TBTCR Divider output control register (a) configuration DVOEN
Port output latch TBTCR
DVO pin output (b) Timing chart
Figure 6-3 Divider Output
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (00036H) DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 "0" 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DVOEN
Divider output enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL, IDLE Mode DV1CK=0 DV1CK=1 fc/214 fc/213 fc/212 fc/211
R/W
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO) frequency selection: [Hz]
00 01 10 11
fc/2
13
fc/212 fc/211 fc/210
R/W
Note 1: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency. Note 2: In case of using DVO output, set output mode by P1CR register after setting the related port output latch to "1" by P1DR register. Note 3: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 4: Be sure to write "0" to TBTCR Register bit 4.
Page 59
6. Time Base Timer (TBT) and Divider Output (DVO)
6.2 Divider Output (DVO) TMP88CS43FG
Example : 2.44 kHz pulse output (fc = 20.0 MHz)
Port setting
LD LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B (TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOCK "00" ; DVOEN "1"
Table 6-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 20.0 MHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz] DVOCK NORMAL, IDLE Mode DV1CK=0 00 01 10 11 2.4415 k 4.8825 k 9.765 k 19.5325 k DV1CK=1 1.22075 k 2.4415 k 4.8825 k 9.765 k
Page 60
TMP88CS43FG
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine. The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as "reset request" or "pseudo nonmaskable interrupt request". Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to "reset request". When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise.
7.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
fc/2 ,fc/2 fc/221,fc/222 fc/219,fc/220 fc/217,fc/218
23 24
Selector
Binary counters Clock Clear 1 2 Overflow WDT output
R S Q Reset request INTWDT interrupt request
2
Interrupt request
Internal reset Q SR
WDTEN WDTT
Writing disable code
Writing clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H WDTCR1
0035H WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 7-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 61
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP88CS43FG
7.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
7.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When WDTCR1 is set to "1" at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1 is set to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated. The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to WDTCR1.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
LD LD LD (WDTCR2), 4EH (WDTCR1), 00001101B (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters. : WDTT 10, WDTOUT 1 : Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing WDTT).
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: :
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: : LD (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters.
Page 62
TMP88CS43FG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 4 3 WDTEN 2 WDTT 1 0 WDTOUT (Initial value: **** 1001)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.) 1: Enable NORMAL mode DV1CK = 0 DV1CK = 1 226/fc 224/fc 222fc 220/fc
Write only
WDTT
Watchdog timer detection time [s]
00 01 10 11
225/fc 223/fc 221fc 219/fc
Write only
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer output select
0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
Note 1: After clearing WDTCR1 to "0", the program cannot set it to "1". Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a unknown data is read. Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode. After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated. Note 5: To clear WDTCR1, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in "7.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable". Note 6: If the watchdog timer is disabled during watchdog timer interrupt processing, the watchdog timer interrupt will never be cleared. Therefore, clear the watchdog timer ( set the clear code (4EH) to WDTCR2 ) before disabling it, or disable the watchdog timer a sufficient time before it overflows. Note 7: The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When clear code (4EH) is written, only the binary counter is cleared, not the internal divider. Depending on the timing at which clear code (4EH) is written on the WDTCR2 register, the overflow time of the binary counter may be at minimum 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Thus, write the clear code using a shorter cycle than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1.
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code) Others: Invalid
Write only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1 = 0. Note 2: *: Don't care Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. Note 4: Write the clear code (4EH) using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Note 5: WDTCR2 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR2 is read, a unknown data is read.
7.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1 to "1" enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1 is initialized to "1" during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 63
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP88CS43FG
7.2.3
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to "0". 2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH). 3. Set WDTCR1 to "0". 4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
DI LD LDW EI (WDTCR2), 04EH (WDTCR1), 0B101H : IMF 0 : Clears the binary coutner : WDTEN 0, WDTCR2 Disable code : IMF 1
Table 7-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 20 MHz) Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT DV1CK = 0 00 01 10 11 1.678 419.430 m 104.858 m 26.214 m NORMAL Mode DV1CK = 1 3.355 838.861 m 209.715 m 52.429 m
Note: If the watchdog timer is disabled during watchdog timer interrupt processing, the watchdog timer interrupt will never be cleared. Therefore, clear the watchdog timer ( set the clear code (4EH) to WDTCR2 ) before disabling it, or disable the watchdog timer a sufficient time before it overflows.
7.2.4
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1 is cleared to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1.
Page 64
TMP88CS43FG
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD LD SP, 08BFH (WDTCR1), 00001000B : Sets the stack pointer : WDTOUT 0
7.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1 is set to "1", a watchdog timer reset request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] ( max. 1.2 s @ fc = 20 MHz).
219/fc [s] 217/fc
Clock Binary counter Overflow INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1= "0")
(WDTT=11B) 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0
Internal reset
(WDTCR1= "1")
A reset occurs Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 7-2 Watchdog timer Interrupt and Reset
Page 65
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP88CS43FG
Page 66
MCAP1
S INTTC1 interript
A
TC1S
8.1 Configuration
Y
B Start MPPG1 TC1S clear Clear PPG output mode
2
Decoder Set Q
Command start
Pulse width measurement mode
External trigger
External trigger start
Rising
Falling
Edge detector
METT1
TC1 Clear B A S Match CMP Y Source clock 16-bit up-counter Pulse width measurement mode
Port (Note)
D
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
Figure 8-1 TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
Toggle Q Clear Selector S Q Set Capture TC1DRB TC1DRA 16-bit timer register A, B Toggle Enable Set Clear PPG output mode Internal reset Write to TC1CR TFF1
Page 67
fc/2 , fc/2
11
12
A
fc/27, fc/28
B
Y
fc/23, fc/24
C
S
2
Window mode Port (Note) pin
ACAP1
TC1CK
TC1CR
TC1 control register
TMP88CS43FG
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.2 TimerCounter Control TMP88CS43FG
8.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 1 is controlled by the TimerCounter 1 control register (TC1CR) and two 16-bit timer registers (TC1DRA and TC1DRB). Timer Register
15 TC1DRA (0011H, 0010H) TC1DRB (0013H, 0012H) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC1DRAH (0011H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC1DRBH (0013H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC1DRAL (0010H) Read/Write TC1DRBL (0012H) Read/Write (Write enabled only in the PPG output mode)
TimerCounter 1 Control Register
7 TC1CR (000FH) 6 ACAP1 MCAP1 METT1 MPPG1 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF1
TC1S
TC1CK
TC1M
TFF1 ACAP1 MCAP1 METT1 MPPG1
Timer F/F1 control Auto capture control Pulse width measurement mode control External trigger timer mode control PPG output control
0: Clear 0:Auto-capture disable 0:Double edge capture 0:Trigger start 0:Continuous pulse generation Timer 00: Stop and counter clear 01: Command start 10: Rising edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Rising edge count (Event) Positive logic count (Window) 11: Falling edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Falling edge count (Event) Negative logic count (Window) O O
1: Set 1:Auto-capture enable 1:Single edge capture
R/W
R/W 1:Trigger start and stop 1:One-shot Extrigger O - Event O - Window O - Pulse O - PPG O O
TC1S
TC1 start control
-
O
O
O
O
O
R/W
-
O
O
O
O
O
NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 TC1CK TC1 source clock select [Hz] 00 01 10 11 TC1 operating mode select fc/2
11
DV1CK = 1 fc/212 fc/28 fc/24 External clock (TC1 pin input) R/W
fc/27 fc/23
TC1M
00: Timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode 01: Window mode 10: Pulse width measurement mode 11: PPG (Programmable pulse generate) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: The timer register consists of two shift registers. A value set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge of the first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (TC1DRAH and TC1DRBH) is written. Therefore, write the lower byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit access instruction). Writing only the lower byte (TC1DRAL and TC1DRBL) does not enable the setting of the timer register. Note 3: To set the mode, source clock, PPG output control and timer F/F control, write to TC1CR during TC1CR=00. Set the timer F/F1 control until the first timer start after setting the PPG mode. Note 4: Auto-capture can be used only in the timer, event counter, and window modes.
Page 68
TMP88CS43FG
Note 5: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC1DRA > TC1DRB > 1 (PPG output mode), TC1DRA > 1 (other modes) Note 6: Set TC1CR to "0" in the mode except PPG output mode. Note 7: Set TC1DRB after setting TC1CR to the PPG output mode. Note 8: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC1CR) is cleared to "00" automatically, and the timer stops. After the STOP mode is exited, set the TC1CR to use the timer counter again. Note 9: Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Note 10:Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Page 69
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
8.3 Function
TimerCounter 1 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes.
8.3.1
Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register 1A (TC1DRA) value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC1CR to "1" captures the upcounter value into the timer register 1B (TC1DRB) with the auto-capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the upcounter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time. Table 8-1
TC1CK DV1CK = 0 Resolution [s] 00 01 10 102.4 6.4 0.5 Maximum Time Setting [s] 6.7108 0.4194 26.214 m
Source Clock for TimerCounter 1 (Example: fc = 20 MHz)
NORMAL, IDLE Mode DV1CK = 1 Resolution [s] 204.8 12.8 0.8 Maximum Time Setting [s] 13.4216 0.8388 52.428 m
Example 1 :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/211 [Hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later (fc = 20 MHz, CGCR = "0")
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000000B (TC1CR), 00010000B (EIRD). 2 (TC1DRA), 2625H ; Sets the timer register (1 s / 211/fc = 2625H) ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1
Example 2 :Auto-capture
LD : LD (TC1CR), 01010000B : WA, (TC1DRB) ; ACAP1 1 ; Wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock ; Reads the capture value
Page 70
TMP88CS43FG
Timer start Source clock Counter TC1DRA
0
1
2
3
4
n-1
n
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
?
n
INTTC1 interruput request
Match detect (a) Timer mode
Counter clear
Source clock
Counter
m-2
m-1
m
m+1
m+2
n-1
n
n+1
Capture
Capture
m+1 m+2
n-1
TC1DRB
?
m-1
m
n
n+1
ACAP1 (b) Auto-capture
Figure 8-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 71
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
8.3.2
External Trigger Timer Mode
In the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. For the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising or falling edge is defined in TC1CR. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (trigger start and stop) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. If the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA, the up-counter is cleared and halted without generating an interrupt request. Therefore, this mode can be used to detect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt. After being halted, the up-counter restarts counting when the trigger edge is detected. * When TC1CR is set to "0" (trigger start) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. The trigger edge for the next counting is ignored if detecting it before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA.
Since the TC1 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. A pulse width of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detection. Example 1 :Generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (fc =20 MHz, CGCR = "1")
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00001000B (TC1CR), 00111000B (EIRD). 2 (TC1DRA), 007DH ; 1ms / 27/fc = 7DH ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Example 2 :Generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the TC1 pin (fc =20 MHz, CGCR = "1")
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC1CR), 00000100B (TC1CR), 01110100B (EIRD). 2 (TC1DRA), 0138H ; 4 ms / 28/fc = 0138H ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC1 external trigger, METT1 = 0
Page 72
TMP88CS43FG
Count start TC1 pin input
Count start
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1 n
0
1
2
3
TC1DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC1 interrupt request
(a) Trigger start (METT1 = 0)
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
Count start
Count clear
Count start
TC1 pin input
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
m-1 m
0
1
2
3
n
0
TC1DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC1 interrupt request
Note: m < n
(b) Trigger start and stop (METT1 = 1)
Figure 8-3 External Trigger Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 73
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
8.3.3
Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Either the rising or falling edge of the input pulse is selected as the count up edge in TC1CR. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin. Since a match between the up-counter and the value set to TC1DRA is detected at the edge opposite to the selected edge, an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the edge opposite to the selected edge. Two or more machine cycles are required for the low-or high-level pulse input to the TC1 pin. Setting TC1CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB with the auto capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC1. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC1DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC1CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC1DRB for the first time.
Timer start
TC1 pin Input Up-counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request ?
0
1 2
n-1
n
0
1
2
At the rising edge (TC1S = 10)
n
Match detect
Counter clear
Figure 8-4 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Table 8-2 Input Pulth Width to TC1 Pin
Minimum Pulse Width [s] NORMAL, IDLE Mode High-going Low-going 23/fc 23/fc
Page 74
TMP88CS43FG
8.3.4
Window Mode
In the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical ANDed product of the input pulse to the TC1 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. Either the positive logic (count up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. Define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock programmed with TC1CR.
Count start Timer start Count stop Count start
TC1 pin input Internal clock Counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request ? 7 Match detect (a) Positive logic (TC1S = 10)
Timer start Count start Count stop Count start
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
Counter clear
TC1 pin input Internal clock Counter TC1DRA INTTC1 interrput request (b) Negative logic (TC1S = 11) ? 9 Match detect Counter clear 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 90 1
Figure 8-5 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 75
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
8.3.5
Pulse Width Measurement Mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC1 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. Either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR. Either the single- or double-edge capture is selected as the trigger edge in TC1CR. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (single-edge capture) Either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. To measure the high-level input pulse width, set the rising edge to TC1CR. To measure the low-level input pulse width, set the falling edge to TC1CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then restarts counting when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. * When TC1CR is set to "0" (double-edge capture) The cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. To measure the cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the rising edge to TC1CR. To measure the cycle starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to TC1CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request. The up-counter continues counting up, and captures the up-counter value into TC1DRB and generates an INTTC1 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting.
Note 1: The captured value must be read from TC1DRB until the next trigger edge is detected. If not read, the captured value becomes a don't care. It is recommended to use a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured value from TC1DRB. Note 2: For the single-edge capture, the counter after capturing the value stops at "1" until detecting the next edge. Therefore, the second captured value is "1" larger than the captured value immediately after counting starts. Note 3: The first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured value.
Page 76
TMP88CS43FG
Example :Duty measurement (resolution fc/27 [Hz], CGCR = "0")
CLR LD DI SET EI LD : PINTTC1: CPL JRS LD LD LD RETI SINTTC1: LD LD LD : RETI : VINTTC1: DW PINTTC1 ; INTTC1 Interrupt vector ; Duty calculation A, (TC1DRBL) W,(TC1DRBH) (WIDTH), WA ; Stores cycle in RAM ; Reads TC1DRB (Cycle) (INTTC1SW). 0 F, SINTTC1 A, (TC1DRBL) W,(TC1DRBH) (HPULSE), WA ; Stores high-level pulse width in RAM ; Reads TC1DRB (High-level pulse width) ; INTTC1 interrupt, inverts and tests INTTC1 service switch (TC1CR), 00100110B (EIRD). 2 (INTTC1SW). 0 (TC1CR), 00000110B ; INTTC1 service switch initial setting Address set to convert INTTC1SW at each INTTC1 ; Sets the TC1 mode and source clock ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC1 ; IMF= "1" ; Starts TC1 with an external trigger at MCAP1 = 0
WIDTH HPULSE TC1 pin INTTC1 interrupt request INTTC1SW
Page 77
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
Count start TC1 pin input Trigger
Count start (TC1S = "10")
Internal clock Counter TC1DRB INTTC1 interrupt request
0
1 2 3 4
n-1 n 0
1 Capture n
2
3
[Application] High-or low-level pulse width measurement (a) Single-edge capture (MCAP1 = "1")
Count start Count start (TC1S = "10")
TC1 pin input
Internal clock Counter TC1DRB INTTC1 interrupt request
0
1 2 3 4
n+1
n
n+1 n+2 n+3 Capture n
m-2 m-1 m 0 1 Capture m
2
[Application] (1) Cycle/frequency measurement (2) Duty measurement (b) Double-edge capture (MCAP1 = "0")
Figure 8-6 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Page 78
TMP88CS43FG
8.3.6
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
In the programmable pulse generation (PPG) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting performed in the internal clock. To start the timer, TC1CR specifies either the edge of the input pulse to the TC1 pin or the command start. TC1CR specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously or not (one-shot pulse). * When TC1CR is set to "0" (Continuous pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation. When TC1CR is cleared to "00" during PPG output, the PPG pin retains the level immediately before the counter stops. * When TC1CR is set to "1" (One-shot pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC1DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC1 interrupt request is generated. TC1CR is cleared to "00" automatically at this time, and the timer stops. The pulse generated by PPG retains the same level as that when the timer stops.
Since the output level of the PPG pin can be set with TC1CR when the timer starts, a positive or negative pulse can be generated. Since the inverted level of the timer F/F1 output level is output to the PPG pin, specify TC1CR to "0" to set the high level to the PPG pin, and "1" to set the low level to the PPG pin. Upon reset, the timer F/F1 is initialized to "0".
Note 1: To change TC1DRA or TC1DRB during a run of the timer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value of the counter. Setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may generate a pulse different from that specified. Note 2: Do not change TC1CR during a run of the timer. TC1CR can be set correctly only at initialization (after reset). When the timer stops during PPG, TC1CR can not be set correctly from this point onward if the PPG output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (Setting TC1CR specifies the timer F/F1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) Therefore, the timer F/F1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrary level of the PPG output. To initialize the timer F/F1, change TC1CR to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the PPG mode. Set TC1CR at this time. Note 3: In the PPG mode, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC1DRA > TC1DRB Note 4: Set TC1DRB after changing the mode of TC1M to the PPG mode.
Page 79
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
Example :Generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 s and low-going for 200 s (fc = 20 MHz, CGCR = "0")
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD (TC1CR), 10001011B (TC1DRA), 04E2H (TC1DRB), 00FAH (TC1CR), 10010111B ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 24/fc s = 04E2H) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 24/fc = 00FAH) ; Starts the timer
I/O port output latch shared with PPG output
Port output enable
PPG pin
Data output
D R
Q
Function output
TC1CR Write to TC1CR Internal reset Match to TC1DRB Match to TC1DRA
Set Clear Toggle Q
Timer F/F1
INTTC1 interrupt request
TC1CR clear
Figure 8-7 PPG Output
Page 80
TMP88CS43FG
Timer start
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
TC1DRB
n
Match detect
TC1DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC1 interrupt request
Note: m > n
(a) Continuous pulse generation (TC1S = 01)
Count start
TC1 pin input
Trigger
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
n
n+1
m
0
TC1DRB
n
TC1DRA
m
PPG pin output
INTTC1 interrupt request
[Application] One-shot pulse output
(b) One-shot pulse generation (TC1S = 10)
Note: m > n
Figure 8-8 PPG Mode Timing Chart
Page 81
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter 1 (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
Page 82
Stop Start control Start Trigger clear
CTC1S CTC1SM CTC1SE CTC1CY CTC1E
9.1 Configuration
Rising edge
CTC pin
S A
Y
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
B
11
12
Edge detection
Falling edge
fc/27 or fc/2 8 fc/25 or fc/26 fc/2 or fc/2 fc/23 or fc/24 fc/22 or fc/23 2 fc/2 or fc/2 fc or fc/2 Y Last coincidence 2 CTC1REG 3 3 Comparator Select write register CTC1DRA CTC1DRB CTC1DRC CTC1M Select read register 2 Read/Write control and clear interrupt CTC1M Interrupt 16-bit up counter
H A B C D E F G
Figure 9-1 CTC Block Diagram
Page 83
CTC1FF0
S
INTCTC1 interrupt
CTC1CK
CTC1S
CTC1SM CTC1E
Toggle Q Set Clear PPG2 pin
CTC1SE
CTC1CY
CTC1M
PPGFF0
CTC1RES
CTC1CR1
CTC1REG
CTC1CK
CTC1FF0
EXTREGDIS
2
3
TMP88CS43FG
CTC1CR2
PPGFF0
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
9.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
9.2 Control
Compare timer/counter 1 is controlled using Compare timer/counter 1 Control Registers (CTC1CR1 and CTC1CR2), as well as three 16-bit Timer Registers (CTC1DRA, CTC1DRB, and CTC1DRC). Compare Timer Registers (CTC1DRH: 00017h, CTC1DRL: 00016h)
CTC1DRA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CTC1DRAH 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 CTC1DRAL 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: ******** ********) Write only Initial value: ******** ******** Write only Initial value: ******** ********
CTC1DRB
CTC1DRBH 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
CTC1DRBL 4 3 2 1 0
CTC1DRC
CTC1DRCH
CTC1DRCL
Note: CTC1DRA, CTC1DRB, and CTC1DRC are write-only registers and must not be used with any of the read-modify-write instructions such as SET, CLR, etc.
Compare Timer/Counter 1 Control Registers (CTC1CR2: 00015h, CTC1CR1: 00014h)
CTC1CR1 lower address CTC1CR2 upper address 7 CTC1RES 7 * 6 PPGFF0 6 EXTRGDIS 5 CTC1M 5 CTC1REG 4 CTC1CY 4 3 CTC1SE 3 2 CTC1E 2 CTC1CK 1 CTC1SM 1 0 CTC1S 0 CTC1FF0 R/W (Initial value: 00000000) R/W (Initial value: *0000000)
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: The CTC1CR1 is 0 when read. Note 3: Use the LDW instruction for write to the CTC1DR H/L Registers. Set a value equal to or greater than 2. Note 4: Write to CTC1DR H/L A, B, and C Registers as many as set with the CTC1CR2 Register CTC1REG bit. Note 5: Data are written to CTC1DR H/L Registers in order of CTC1DRA, CTC1DRB, and CTC1DRC.
Page 84
TMP88CS43FG
Setting-up the CTC1CR1 Register
Timer CTC1S Control start 0: Stop and clear counter 1: Command start 0: Software start 1: External trigger start 0: Enable one edge 1: Enable both edges 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Successive 1: One shot CTC1SM Select start Event x x x PPG R/W
CTC1E
Select external trigger edge Select external trigger start edge Select cycle
CTC1SE
CTC1CY
CTC1M PPGFF0 CTC1RES
Set operation mode Select PPG output Reset all
0: Timer/Event counter modes 1: PPG (programmable pulse generator) output mode 0: Forward output immediately after start 1: Reverse output immediately after start 0: Normal operation 1: CTC1 reset
Setting-up the CTC1CR2 Register
CTC1FF0 Control timer output F/F0 0: Clear 1: Set NORMAL and IDLE Modes DV1CK = 0 000 001 CTC1CK Select timer/counter clock source Unit: Hz 010 011 100 101 110 111 Set registers used by timer/ counter fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fc/22 fc/2 DV1CK = 1 fc/212 fc/28 fc/26 fc/24 fc/23 fc/22 R/W
External clock input (CTC1 pin input) 1REG 2REG 3REG
CTC1REG
00: CTC1DRA 01: CTC1DRA + CTC1DRB 10: CTC1DRA + CTC1DRB + CTC1DRC 11: Reserved 0: Enable external trigger input 1: Disable external trigger input
EXTRGDIS
External trigger input
Note 1: fc: Clock [Hz] Note 2: Make sure the timer/counter is idle (CTC1CR1 = 00) before setting operation mode, edge, start, source clock, external trigger timer mode control, and PPG output control. Note 3: The CTC1DRB and CTC1DRC Registers cannot be accessed for write unless they are set for PPG output mode and specified with CTC1CR2. Note 4: CTC1CR1 is effective only when using an external clock as trigger (CTC1CR1). Note 5: Data must be written to as many data registers as set with CTC1CR2. Note 6: To write data to CTC1DRA/B/C, use the LDW instruction, or use the LD instruction writing in order of L, H. Note 7: Data register values must be written to the respective registers before starting. To modify the values after starting, write the new data within an interval from an INTCTC1 interrupt to the next INTCTC1. Note 8: Specifying CTC1CR1 = 1 causes all conditions to be reset. Even when the CTC circuit is operating, they are reset, and the PPG output becomes "0". However, only the INTCTC1 signal is not reset if the signal is being generated. Note 9: For event counter mode (when CTC pin input is selected in timer mode), the active edge of the external trigger to count can be selected with CTC1CR1. Note 10:Disabling external trigger input with CTC1CR2 creates the 0 input state. Note 11:To stop the counter by software at trigger start, set CTC1CR2 = 00.
Page 85
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
9.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
Note 12:The number of registers set and the values set in the timer registers must meet the conditions shown below.
Number of Registers 1 Register CTC1REG 2 Register 3 Register CTC1DRA 2
Timer Register Value Conditions
CTC1DRB > CTC1DRA + 1, and CTC1DRA 2 CTC1DRC > CTC1DRB + 1, CTC1DRB > CTC1DRA + 1, and CTC1DRA 2
Page 86
TMP88CS43FG
9.3 Function
Compare timer/counter 1 has three modes: timer, event counter, and programmable pulse generator output modes.
9.3.1
Timer mode with software start
In this mode, the timer/counter (16-bit counter) counts up synchronously with the internal clock. When the counter value and the set value of Compare Timer Register 1 (CTC1DRA) match, an INTCTC1 interrupt is generated and the counter is cleared. After the counter is cleared, it restarts and continues counting up.
Table 9-1
Internal Clock Source for Compare Timer/Counter 1 (Example: fc = 20 MHz)
NORMAL and IDLE Modes
CTC1CK Resolution [s] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 102.4 6.4 1.6 0.4 0.2 0.1 -
DV1CK = 0 Maximum Setting Time [s] 6.71 0.419 0.105 26.21 m 13.11 m 6.55 m Resolution [s] 204.8 12.8 3.2 0.8 0.4 0.2 -
DV1CK = 1 Maximum Setting Time [s] 13.42 0.839 0.210 52.43 m 26.21 m 13.11 m -
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
3
n-1 n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Timer Register A
n
INTCTC1 interrupt
Successive
Figure 9-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Note:If the CTC input port (P47) is set for input mode, the timer/counter is reset by an input edge on port. When using the timer/counter as an ordinary timer, set CTC1CR2 to 1 or set P47 for output mode.
Page 87
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
9.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
9.3.2
Timer mode with external trigger start
In this timer mode, the timer/counter starts counting as triggered by input on CTC pin (rising or falling edge selected with CTC1CR1). The source clock is an internal clock. For successive cycles, when the counter value and the set value of the CTC1DRA Register match, an INTCTC1 interrupt is generated and the counter is cleared and then restarted. The counter is stopped by a trigger input on CTC pin and restarted by the next trigger input. For a one-shot cycle, when the counter value and the set value of the CTC1DRA Register match, an INTCTC1 interrupt is generated and the counter is cleared and stopped. The counter restarts counting up by input on CTC pin. When CTC1CR1 = 1, the counter is cleared and stops counting at an edge on CTC pin input opposite the active edge that triggers the counter to start counting. In this mode, an interrupt can be generated by entering a pulse which has a certain width. When CTC1CR1 = 0, opposite edges on CTC input are ignored.
(I) When rising edge start is selected, with counting enabled on one edge ( CTC1SE = 0, CTC1E = 0 )
Count start Stop Trigger Count start Trigger
CTC pin input
Trigger
Internal clock Counter Timer Register A INTCTC1 interrupt
Successive Count start Count start Trigger
0
1
2
n-1 n
1
Clear
2
3
4
1
2
n
CTC pin input
Trigger
Internal clock Counter Timer Register A INTCTC1 interrupt One Shot
0
1
2
n-1 n
Stop
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
n
Figure 9-3 External Trigger Mode Timing Chart
Page 88
TMP88CS43FG
(II) When rising start edge is selected, with counting enabled on both edges ( CTC1SE = 0, CTC1E = 1 )
Count start Count stop Trigger Count start Trigger
CTC pin input
Trigger
Internal clock Counter Timer Register A INTCTC1 interrupt
Successive Count start Count start Trigger Count clear Trigger Note) m < n
0
1
2
m
0
1
n-1 n
1
23
n
CTC pin input
Trigger
Internal clock Counter Timer Register A INTCTC1 interrupt One Shot
0
1
2
n
0
1
2
3
4
50
1
2
3
n
Figure 9-4 External Trigger Mode Timing Chart 9.3.3 Event counter mode
In this mode, the timer/counter counts up at the active edge on CTC pin input (rising or falling edge selected with the CTC1CR1 which is provided for selecting external trigger edge). When the counter value and the set value of the CTC1DRA Register match, an INTCTC1 interrupt is generated and the counter is cleared. After the counter is cleared, it restarts and continues counting up at each edge on CTC pin input. The maximum applied frequency is shown in the table below. Because coincidence detection is made at an edge opposite the selected edge, the external clock signal on CTC pin must always be entered.
When rising start edge is selected
Command start
CTC pin input
Counter
0
1
2
n-1
n
0
1
Timer Register INTCTC1 interrupt
n
Figure 9-5 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Page 89
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
9.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
Table 9-2 External Clock Source for Compare Timer/Counter 1
NORMAL and IDLE Modes Maximum applied frequency [Hz] Minimum pulse width Up to fc/22 22/fc and over
9.3.4
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) output mode
The timer/counter starts counting as a command or edge on CTC pin input (rising/falling edge and one/both edges respectively selected with the CTC1CR1 and CTC1CR1). The source clock is an internal clock. When matched with the CTC1DR A/B/C Registers, the timer output F/F corresponding to each mode is inverted. When matched with the CTC1DR A/B/C Registers next time, the timer output F/F is inverted again. An INTCTC1 interrupt request is generated when the counter value matches the maximum register value set by CTC1CR2. The timer output F/F is cleared to 0 when reset. Because CTC1CR2 can be used to set the initial value for the timer output F/F, an active-high or active-low pulse whichever is desired can be output. The CTC1DRB and CTC1DRC Registers cannot be accessed for write unless they are set for PPG output mode and the registers used are selected with CTC1CR2. The number of registers set can be altered during operation. In this case, however, be sure to set the number of registers used and write values to the data registers before the next CTC1INIT1 is output after the first CTC1INIT1 output. Even when only altering the data register values while leaving the number of registers unchanged, be sure to do this within the same period of time.
Table 9-3
Internal Clock Source for Compare Timer/Counter 1 (Example: fc = 20 MHz)
NORMAL and IDLE Modes
CTC1CK Resolution [s] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 102.4 6.4 1.6 0.4 0.2 0.1 -
DV1CK = 0 Maximum Setting Time [s] 6.71 0.419 0.105 26.21 m 13.11 m 6.55 m Resolution [s] 204.8 12.8 3.2 0.8 0.4 0.2 -
DV1CK = 1 Maximum Setting Time [s] 13.42 0.839 0.210 52.43 m 26.21 m 13.11 m -
(I) One register used When command start, interrupt output, and counter clear are set in Timer Register A Command start CTC pin input
Counter
0
1
n
1
n
1
n
1
n
1
2
3
Timer Register A
n
PPG2 pin output INTCTC1 interrupt Successive
Figure 9-6 PPG Output Mode Timing Chart
Page 90
TMP88CS43FG
(II) Two registers used (CTC1REG = 01) When external trigger rising edge start, one edge enable, interrupt output, and counter clear are set in Timer Register B.
Command start Stop
CTC pin input
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
m
m+1
n
1
m
m+1
n
1
2
0
Timer Register A
m
Timer Register B
n
PPG2 pin output INTCTC1 interrupt
Successive Command start
Initial value
Start
CTC pin input
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
m
m+1
n
0
1
Timer Register A
m
Timer Register B
n
PPG2 pin output INTCTC1 interrupt
One shot
Figure 9-7 PPG Output Two Register Mode Timing Chart
Page 91
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
9.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
When external trigger rising edge start, both edges enable, interrupt output, and counter clear are set in Timer Register B.
Command start Stop Start
CTC pin input
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
m
m+1
n
1
m
0
1
Timer Register A
m
Timer Register B
n
Initial value
PPG2 pin output INTCTC1 interrupt
Successive Start Start Start Start
CTC pin input
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
m
m+1
n
0
1
201
m
m+1
01
m
m+1
n0
Timer Register A
m
Timer Register B
n
PPG2 pin output INTCTC1 interrupt
One shot
Figure 9-8 PPG Output External Trigger Mode Timing Chart
Page 92
TMP88CS43FG
(III) Three registers used (CTC1REG = 10) When command start, interrupt output, and counter clear are set in Timer Register C.
Command start
CTC pin input
Counter
0
1
m
m+1
n
n+1
s
1
m
m+1
n
Timer Register A
m
Timer Register B
n
Timer Register C
s
PPG2 pin output INTCTC1 interrupt
Successive Command start Command restart
CTC pin input
Counter
0
1
m
m+1
n
n+1
s
0
1
m
m+1
Timer Register A
m
Timer Register B
n
Timer Register C
s
PPG2 pin output INTCTC1 interrupt
One shot
Note: In the single-shot mode, the PPG pin output is not toggled at the last register match; it stays at the value specified with CTC1CR2.
Figure 9-9 PPG Output Three Register Mode Timing Chart
Page 93
9. 16-Bit Timer (CTC)
9.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
Detail operation at start that varies depending on how CTC1CR2 and CTC1CR1 are set during PPG output. Table 9-4 Varying PPG Output Timing Depending on Settings
CTC1FF0 setting (write to CTC1CR1 Register)
Command start or trigger start
Internal clock
CTC1FF0 = 0 PPGFF0 = 0
Counter
0
1
2
3
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
PPG output
CTC1FF0 setting (write to CTC1CR1 Register)
Command start or trigger start
Internal clock
CTC1FF0 = 1 PPGFF0 = 0
Counter
0
1
2
3
n
n+1 n+2 n+3
PPG output
CTC1FF0 setting (write to CTC1CR1 Register)
Command start or trigger start
Internal clock
CTC1FF0 = 0 PPGFF0 = 1
Counter
0
1
2
3
n
n+1 n+2 n+3
PPG output
CTC1FF0 setting (write to CTC1CR1 Register)
Command start or trigger start
Internal clock
CTC1FF0 = 1 PPGFF0 = 1
Counter
0
1
2
3
n
n+1 n+2 n+3
PPG output
By changing the port-shared output for PPG output before the counter starts counting after setting CTC1CR2, it is possible to determine the initial value of PPG output.
Page 94
TMP88CS43FG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter 3 (TC3)
10.1 Configuration
Falling
INTTC3 interrupt Clear
Edge detector
Rising
TC3 pin
TC3S
Port (Note)
fc/213, fc/2 14 fc/212, fc/2 13 fc/211 , fc/2 12 fc/210, fc/2 11 fc/2 9 , fc/210 fc/2 8 , fc/2 9 fc/2 7 , fc/2 8
H AY B C D E F G S
3
Source clock
8-bit up-counter
Overflow detect
TC3S
CMP
Match detect
A B S
Y
TC3DRB
Capture
TC3DRA
Capture
8-bit timer register
TC3CK
TC3M
TC3CR
TC3 contorol register
Note: Function input may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
Figure 10-1 TimerCounter 3 (TC3)
ACAP
TC3S
Page 95
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter 3 (TC3)
10.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TC3DRA and TC3DRB). Timer Register and Control Register
TC3DRA (001CH) TC3DRB (001DH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Read only (Initial value: 1111 1111)
TC3CR (001EH)
7
6 ACAP
5
4 TC3S
3
2 TC3CK
1
0 TC3M (Initial value: *0*0 0000)
ACAP TC3S
Auto capture control TC3 start control
0: - 1: Auto capture 0: Stop and counter clear 1: Start NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK=0 000 001 fc/2
13
R/W R/W
DV1CK=1 fc/214 fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/210 fc/29 fc/28 R/W
fc/212 fc/211 fc/210 fc/29 fc/28 fc/27 External clock (TC3pin input)
TC3CK
TC3 source clock select [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
TC3M
TC3 operating mode select
0: Timer/event counter mode 1: Capture mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: Set the operating mode and source clock when TimerCounter stops (TC3CR = 0). Note 3: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC3DRA > 1 (Timer/event counter mode) Note 4: Auto-capture (TC3CR) can be used only in the timer and event counter modes. Note 5: When the read instruction is executed to TC3CR, the bit 5 and 7 are read as a don't care. Note 6: Do not program TC3DRA when the timer is running (TC3CR = 1). Note 7: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC3CR) is cleared to 0 automatically, and the timer stops. After the STOP mode is exited, TC3CR must be set again to use the timer counter.
Page 96
TMP88CS43FG
10.3 Function
TimerCounter 3 has three types of operating modes: timer, event counter and capture modes.
10.3.1 Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register 3A (TC3DRA) value is detected, an INTTC3 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC3CR to 1 captures the upcounter value into the timer register 3B (TC3DRB) with the auto-capture function. The count value during timer operation can be checked by executing the read instruction to TC3DRB.
Note:00H which is stored in the up-counter immediately after detection of a match is not captured into TC3DRB. (Figure 10-2)
Clock TC3DRA Up-counter
Match detect C8
C6
C7
C8
00
01
TC3DRB
C6
C7
C8
01
Note: In the case that TC3DRB is C8H
Figure 10-2 Auto-Capture Function
Table 10-1 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3 (Example: fc = 20 MHz)
TC3CK DV1CK = 0 Resolution [s] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 409.6 204.8 102.4 51.2 25.6 12.8 6.4 Maximum Time Setting [ms] 104.45 52.22 26.11 13.06 6.53 3.06 1.63 Resolution [s] 819.2 409.6 204.8 102.4 51.2 25.6 12.8 NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 1 Maximum Time Setting [ms] 208.90 104.45 52.22 26.11 13.06 6.53 3.06
Page 97
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter 3 (TC3)
10.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
Timer start Source clock Counter
0
1
2
3
4
n0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TC3DRA INTTC3 interrupt
?
n
Match detect
Counter clear
(a)
Timer mode
Source clock Counter
m m+1 m+2 n n+1
Capture
Capture
m+1 m+2
n
TC3DRB
?
m
n+1
TC3CR (b) Auto capture
Figure 10-3 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 98
TMP88CS43FG
10.3.2 Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. When a match between the up-counter and TC3DRA value is detected, an INTTC3 interrupt is generated and up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each rising edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. Since a match is detected at the falling edge of the input pulse to TC3 pin, an INTTC3 interrupt request is generated at the falling edge immediately after the up-counter reaches the value set in TC3DRA. The maximum applied frequencies are shown in Table 10-2. The pulse width larger than one machine cycle is required for high-going and low-going pulses. Setting TC3CR to 1 captures the up-counter value into TC3DRB with the auto-capture function. The count value during a timer operation can be checked by the read instruction to TC3DRB.
Note:00H which is stored in the up-counter immediately after detection of a match is not captured into TC3DRB. (Figure 10-2)
Example :Inputting 50 Hz pulse to TC3, and generating interrupts every 0.5 s
LD LD LD (TC3CR), 00001110B (TC3DRA), 19H (TC3CR), 00011110B : Sets the clock mode : 0.5 s / 1/50 = 25 = 19H : Starts TC3.
Table 10-2 Maximum Frequencies Applied to TC3
Minimum Pulse Width NORMAL, IDLE mode High-going Low-going 22/fc 22/fc
Timer start
TC3 pin input Counter
0
1
2
3
n
0
1
2
3
Match detect
Counter clear
TC3DRA
n
INTTC3 interrupt
Figure 10-4 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Page 99
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter 3 (TC3)
10.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
10.3.3 Capture Mode
In the capture mode, the pulse width, frequency and duty cycle of the pulse input to the TC3 pin are measured with the internal clock. The capture mode is used to decode remote control signals, and identify AC50/60 Hz. When the falling edge of the TC3 input is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter value is captured into TC3DRB. Hereafter, whenever the rising edge is detected, the up-counter value is captured into TC3DRA and the INTTC3 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time. Generally, read TC3DRB and TC3DRA during INTTC3 interrupt processing. After the up-counter is cleared, counting is continued and the next up-counter value is captured into TC3DRB. When the rising edge is detected immediately after the timer starts, the up-counter value is captured into TC3DRA only, but not into TC3DRB. The INTTC3 interrupt request is generated. When the read instruction is executed to TC3DRB at this time, the value at the completion of the last capture (FF immediately after a reset) is read. The minimum input pulse width must be larger than one cycle width of the source clock programmed in TC3CR. The INTTC3 interrupt request is generated if the up-counter overflow (FFH) occurs during capture operation before the edge is detected. TC3DRA is set to FFH and the up-counter is cleared. Counting is continued by the up-counter, but capture operation and overflow detection are stopped until TC3DRA is read. Generally, read TC3DRB first because capture operation and overflow detection resume by reading TC3DRA.
Timer start
TC3CR
Source clock Counter TC3 pin input
Internal waveform
0 1
i-1 i i+1
k-1 k 0
1
m-1
m
m+1
n-1 n 0
1
2
3
FE FF 0
1
2
3
Capture TC3DRA TC3DRB INTTC3 interrupt request Read of TC3DRA Capture i k Capture m
Capture n Capture
FE
FF (Overflow)
Overflow
Figure 10-5 Capture Mode Timing Chart
Page 100
TMP88CS43FG
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter 4 (TC4)
11.1 Configuration
TC4S
fc/211, fc212 fc/27, fc28 fc/25, fc26 fc/23, fc24 fc/22, fc23 fc/2, fc22 fc, fc/2
(Note)
A B Source C Clock Clear D EY 8-bit up-counter Y F G H
Overflow detect
0 1 S Y
TC4 pin
S
3
CMP
Match detect
Timer F/F
TC4CK
Toggle
Port (Note)
TC4S
TC4M
2
0 Y
1
Clear
S
PWM4/ PDO4/ pin
TC4CR
TC4DR
PWM output mode
TC4S
INTTC4 interrupt
PDO mode
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
Figure 11-1 TimerCounter 4 (TC4)
Page 101
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter 4 (TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
11.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and timer registers 4 (TC4DR). Timer Register and Control Register
TC4DR (001BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 1111 1111)
TC4CR (001AH)
7
6
5 TC4S
4
3 TC4CK
2
1 TC4M
0 Read/Write (Initial value: **00 0000)
TC4S
TC4 start control
0: Stop and counter clear 1: Start NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 000 001 fc/2
11
R/W
DV1CK = 1 fc/212 fc/28 fc/26 fc/24 fc/23 fc/22 (fc/2)Note8 R/W
fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fc/22 fc/2 (fc)Note8
TC4CK
TC4 source clock select [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
External clock (TC4 pin input)
TC4M
TC4 operating mode select
00: Timer/event counter mode 01: Reserved 10: Programmable divider output (PDO) mode 11: Pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. 1 TC4DR 255 Note 3: To start timer operation (TC4CR = 0 1) or disable timer operation (TC4CR = 1 0), do not change the TC4CR setting. During timer operation (TC4CR = 1 1), do not change it, either. If the setting is programmed during timer operation, counting is not performed correctly. Note 4: The event counter and PWM output modes are used only in the NOMAL and IDLE modes. Note 5: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC4S) is cleared to "0" automatically. Note 6: The bit 6 and 7 of TC4CR are read as a don't care when these bits are read. Note 7: In the timer, event counter and PDO modes, do not change the TC4DR setting when the timer is running. Note 8: When the high-frequency clock fc exceeds 10 MHz, do not select the source clock of TC4CR< TC4CK> = 110. Note 9: For available source clocks depending on the operation mode, refer to the following table.
Timer Mode 000 001 010 TC4CK 011 100 101 110 111 O O O O - - - -
Event Counter Mode - - - - - - - O
PDO Mode O O O - - - - -
PWM Mode - - - O O O O x
Note: O : Available source clock
Page 102
TMP88CS43FG
11.3 Function
TimerCounter 4 has four types of operating modes: timer, event counter, programmable divider output (PDO), and pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes.
11.3.1 Timer Mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TC4DR value is detected, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Table 11-1 Internal Source Clock for TimerCounter 4 (Example: fc = 20 MHz)
TC4CK DV1CK = 0 Resolution [s] 000 001 010 011 102.4 6.4 1.6 0.4 Maximum Time Setting [ms] 26.11 1.63 0.41 0.10 Resolution [s] 204.8 12.8 3.2 0.8 NORMAL, IDLE Mode DV1CK = 1 Maximum Time Setting [ms] 52.22 3.28 0.82 0.20
11.3.2 Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC4 pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TC4DR value is detected, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at rising edge of the TC4 pin. Since a match is detected at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC4 pin, the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated at the falling edge immediately after the up-counter reaches the value set in TC4DR. The minimum pulse width applied to the TC4 pin are shown in Table 11-2. The pulse width larger than two machine cycles is required for high- and low-going pulses.
Note:The event counter mode can used in the NORMAL and IDLE modes only.
Table 11-2 External Source Clock for TimerCounter 4
Minimum Pulse Width NORMAL, IDLE mode High-going Low-going 23/fc 23/fc
11.3.3 Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode
The programmable divider output (PDO) mode is used to generated a pulse with a 50% duty cycle by counting with the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TC4DR value is detected, the logic level output from the PDO4 pin is switched to the opposite state and INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time and then counting is continued. When a match between the up-counter and the TC4DR value is detected, the logic level output from the PDO4 pin is switched to the opposite state again and INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then counting and PDO are continued. When the timer is stopped, the PDO4 pin is high. Therefore, if the timer is stopped when the PDO4 pin is low, the duty pulse may be shorter than the programmed value. Page 103
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter 4 (TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse (fc = 20.0 Mhz and CGCR = 0)
LD SET LD LD (TC4CR), 00000110B (P2DR), 2 (TC4DR), 4CH (TC4CR), 00100110B : Sets the PDO mode. (TC4M = 10, TC4CK = 001) : Sets the P22 output latch to 1. : 1/1024 / 27/fc / 2 (half cycle period) = 4CH : Start TC4
Internal clock
Counter
TC4DR Timer F/F
0
1
2
n0
1
2
n0
1
2
n0
1
2
n0
1
n
Match detect
PDO4 pin INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 11-2 PDO Mode Timing Chart 11.3.4 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode
The pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode is used to generate the PWM pulse with up to 8 bits of resolution by an internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TC4DR value is detected, the logic level output from the
PWM4 pin becomes low. The up-counter continues counting. When the up-counter overflow occurs, the PWM4
pin becomes high. The INTTC4 interrupt request is generated at this time. When the timer is stopped, the PWM4 pin is high. Therefore, if the timer is stopped when the PWM4 pin is low, one PMW cycle may be shorter than the programmed value. TC4DR is serially connected to the shift register. If TC4DR is programmed during PWM output, the data set to TC4DR is not shifted until one PWM cycle is completed. Therefore, a pulse can be modulated periodically. For the first time, the data written to TC4DR is shifted when the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1.
Note 1: The PWM output mode can be used only in the NORMAL and IDEL modes. Note 2: In the PWM output mode, program TC4DR immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated (typically in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) When the programming of TC4DR and the INTTC4 interrupt occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is issued.
Page 104
TMP88CS43FG
TC4CR
Internal clock
Counter
TC4DR
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
Rewrite
? n m
Rewrite
p
Rewrite Data shift
m
Data shift Shift register
Timer F/F
? n
Data shift
Match detect
Match detect
Match detect
PWM4 pin INTTC4 interrupt request
n
n
m
PWM cycle
Figure 11-3 PWM output Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Table 11-3 PWM Mode (Example: fc = 20 MHz)
TC4CK DV1CK = 0 Resolution [ns] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 - - - 400 200 100 - Cycle [s] - - - 102.4 51.2 25.6 - NORMAL, IDLE Mode DV1CK = 1 Resolution [ns] - - - 800 400 200 - Cycle [s] - - - 204.8 102.4 51.2 -
Page 105
11. 8-Bit TimerCounter 4 (TC4)
11.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
Page 106
TMP88CS43FG
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
12.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211, fc/212 INTTC6 interrupt request
fc/2 , fc/2 5 6 fc/2 , fc/2 fc/23, fc/24
7
8
TC6 pin TC6M TC6S TFF6
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC6S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F6 PDO6/PWM6/ PPG6 pin
TC6CK TC6CR TTREG6 PWREG6
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF6
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC5S
PWM mode
fc/211, fc/212
7 8
fc/2 , fc/2 fc/25, fc/26 3 4 fc/2 , fc/2
TC5 pin TC5M TC5S TFF5
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC5 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F5
PDO5/PWM5/ pin
TC5CK TC5CR TTREG5 PWREG5
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF5
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 12-1 8-Bit TimerCouter 5, 6
Page 107
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
12.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
12.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 5 is controlled by the TimerCounter 5 control register (TC5CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG5, PWREG5). TimerCounter 5 Timer Register
TTREG5 (0022H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG5 (0024H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG5) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 5 Control Register
TC5CR (0020H) 7 TFF5 6 5 TC5CK 4 3 TC5S 2 1 TC5M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF5
Time F/F5 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 DV1CK = 1 fc/212 fc/28 fc/26 fc/24 TC5I pin input
R/W
000 001 TC5CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC5S TC5 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC5M TC5M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 -
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC6M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC5S= 1 0), do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings. To start the timer operation (TC5S= 0 1), TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC6CR, where TC5M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6CR and TC6CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 12-1.
Page 108
TMP88CS43FG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 122.
Page 109
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
12.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
The TimerCounter 6 is controlled by the TimerCounter 6 control register (TC6CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG6 and PWREG6). TimerCounter 6 Timer Register
TTREG6 (0023H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG6 (0025H) R/ W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG6) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 6 Control Register
TC6CR (0021H) 7 TFF6 6 5 TC6CK 4 3 TC6S 2 1 TC6M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF6
Timer F/F6 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 DV1CK = 1 fc/212 fc/28 fc/25 fc/23 TC6I pin input
R/W
000 001 TC6CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC6S TC6 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC6M TC6M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 -
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC6S= 1 0), do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings. To start the timer operation (TC6S= 0 1), TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC6M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC6 overflow signal regardless of the TC5CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC6M, where TC5CR must be set to 011. Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6S and TFF6, respectively.
Page 110
TMP88CS43FG
Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 12-1. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 122.
Table 12-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL and IDLE Modes)
Operating mode 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG fc/211 - - fc/27 - - fc/25 - - fc/23 - - TC5 pin input - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 12-2 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 2 (PWREG6, 5) 65534 1 (PWREG6, 5) < (TTREG6, 5) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG6, 5) + 1 < (TTREG6, 5) Register Value
Note: n = 5 to 6
Page 111
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
12.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
12.3 Function
The TimerCounter 5 and 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 (TC5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
12.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 12-3 Source Clock for TimerCounter 5, 6 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV1CK = 1 fc/212 [Hz] fc/28 fc/26 fc/24 Resolution DV1CK = 0 fc = 20 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns Repeated Cycle DV1CK = 0 fc = 20 MHz 32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 64 s later (TimerCounter6, fc = 20.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC6CR), 00010000B (TC6CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC6. (EIRC). EF37 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG6), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
TC6CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG6
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 12-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Page 112
TMP88CS43FG
12.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL or IDLE mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
TC6CR TC6 pin input
Counter
TTREG6
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 12-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 12.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC6 (fc = 20.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG6), 3DH (TC6CR), 00010001B (TC6CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC6.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Page 113
12.1 Configuration
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 12-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 114
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG6
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
Set F/F
PDO6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP88CS43FG
TMP88CS43FG
12.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc or fc/2 is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 5, 6
Table 12-4 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV1CK = 1 fc/212 [Hz] fc/28 fc/26 fc/24 Resolution DV1CK = 0 fc = 20 MHz 102.4 s 6.4 s 1.6 s 0.4 s DV1CK = 1 fc = 20 MHz 204.8 s 12.8 s 3.2 s 0.8 s Repeated Cycle DV1CK = 0 fc = 20 MHz 26.21 ms 1.64 ms 410 s 102 s DV1CK = 1 fc = 20 MHz 52.43 ms 3.28 ms 819 s 205 s
Page 115
12.1 Configuration
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG6
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
Write to PWREG6
FF
0
1
p
Figure 12-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
m Shift Shift m
Match detect Match detect
Page 116
n One cycle period m
PWREG6
?
n
p Shift p
Match detect
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
n
p
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP88CS43FG
TMP88CS43FG
12.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 12-5 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 fc/211 fc/2
7
Resolution DV1CK = 0 fc = 20 MHz 102.4 s 6.4 s 1.6 s 0.4 s DV1CK = 1 fc = 20 MHz 204.8 s 12.8 s 3.2 s 0.8 s
Maximum Time Setting DV1CK = 0 fc = 20 MHz 6.7 s 419.4 ms 104.9 s 26.2 s DV1CK = 1 fc = 20 MHz 13.4 s 838.8 ms 209.7 ms 52.4 ms
DV1CK = 1 fc/212 fc/2
8
fc/25 fc/2
3
fc/26 fc/2
4
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 [Hz], and generating an interrupt 240 ms later (fc = 20.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC5CR), 13H :Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRD). EF28 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG5), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC6CR), 04H (TC6CR), 0CH
TC6CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG5 (Lower byte) TTREG6 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 12-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 117
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
12.1 Configuration TMP88CS43FG
12.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC5 pin. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC5 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL or IDLE mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG5), and upper byte (TTREG6) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
12.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6 logic level.) Since PWREG6 and 5 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG6 and 5 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG6 and 5. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG6 and 5. Set the lower byte (PWREG5) and upper byte (PWREG5) in this order to program PWREG6 and 5. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG6 and 5 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG6 and 5. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG6 and 5, reading data of PWREG6 and 5 is previous value until INTTC6 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG6 and 5 immediately after the INTTC6 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC6 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing thePWM6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC6CR).7 : Sets the PWM6 pin to the high level.
Page 118
TMP88CS43FG
Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc or fc/2 is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM6 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 12-6 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 fc/211[Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV1CK = 1 fc/212 [Hz] fc/28 fc/26 fc/24 Resolution DV1CK = 0 fc = 20MHz 102.4 s 6.4 s 1.6 s 0.4 s DV1CK = 1 fc = 20MHz 204.8 s 12.8 s 3.2 s 0.8 s Repeated Cycle DV1CK = 0 fc = 20 MHz 6.7 s 419.4 ms 104.9 ms 26.2 ms DV1CK = 1 fc = 20 MHz 13.4 s 838.8 ms 209.7 ms 52.4 ms
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 20.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 056H (TC6CR), 05EH
Page 119
12.1 Configuration
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG5
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG5
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG6
n
m
p
Write to PWREG6
Figure 12-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 120
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
an
cp
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP88CS43FG
TMP88CS43FG
12.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG5 TTREG6, PWREG5 PWREG6) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 20.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TTREG5), 8002H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 057H (TC6CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC6CR).7: Sets the PPG6 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 5, 6
Page 121
12.1 Configuration
12. 8-Bit TimerCounter 5,6(TC5, 6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 12-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC60)
Page 122
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG5 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG6 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F6
PPG6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP88CS43FG
TMP88CS43FG
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
The TMP88CS43FG contains two channels of motor control circuits used for sinusoidal waveform output. This motor control circuit can control brushless DC motors or AC motors with or without sensors. With its primary functions like those listed below incorporated in hardware, it helps to accomplish sine wave motor control easily, with the software load significantly reduced. 1. Rotor position detect function * Can detect the rotor position, with or without sensors * Can be set to determine the rotor position when detection matched a number of times, to prevent erroneous detection * Can set a position detection inhibit period immediately after PWM-on 2. Independent timer and timer capture functions for motor control * Contains one-channel magnitude comparison timer and two-channel coincidence comparison timers that operate synchronously for position detection 3. PWM waveform generating function * Generates 12-bit PWM with 100 ns resolution * Can set a frequency of PWM interrupt occurrence * Can set the dead time at PWM-on 4. Protective function * Provides overload protective function based on protection signal input 5. Emergency stop function in case of failure * Can be made to stop in an emergency by EMG input or timer overflow interrupt * Not easily cleared by software runaway 6. Auto commutation/Auto position detection start function * Comprised of dual-buffers, can activate auto commutation synchronously with position detection or timer * Can set a position detection period using the timer function and start auto position detection at the set time 7. Electrical angle timer function * Can count 360 degrees of electrical angle with a set period in the range of 0 to 383 * Can output the counted electrical angle to the waveform arithmetic circuit 8. Waveform arithmetic circuit * Calculate the output duty cycle from the sine wave data and voltage data which are read from the RAM based on the electrical angle timer * Output the calculation result to the waveform synthesis circuit
Page 123
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.1 Outline of Motor Control
The following explains the method for controlling a brushless DC motor with sine wave drive. In a brushless DC motor, the rotor windings to which to apply electric current are determined from the rotor's magnetic pole position, and the current-applied windings are changed as the rotor turns. The rotor's magnetic pole position is determined using a sensor such as a hall IC or by detecting polarity change (zero-cross) points of the induced voltage that develops in the motor windings (sensorless control). For the sensorless case, the induced voltage is detected by applying electric current to two phases and not applying electric current to the remaining other phase. In this two-phase current on case, there are six current application patterns as shown in Table 13-1, which are changed synchronously with the phases of the rotor. In this two-phase current on case, the current on time in each phase is 120 degrees relative to 180 degrees of the induced voltage. Table 13-1 Current Application Patterns
Current Application Pattern Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Upper Transistor u ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF v OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF w OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON x OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF Lower Transistor Current on Winding y ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON z OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF UV UW VW VU WU WV
Note: One of the upper or lower transistors is PWM controlled.
For brushless DC motors, the number of revolutions is controlled by an applied voltage, and the voltage application is controlled by PWM. At this time, the current on windings need to be changed in synchronism with the phases of the voltage induced by revolutions. Control timing in cases where the current on windings are changed by means of sensorless control is illustrated in Figure 13-4. For three-phase motors, zero-crossing occurs six times during one cycle of the induced voltage (electrical angle 360 degrees), so that the electrical angle from one zero-cross point to the next is 60 degrees. Assuming that this period comprises one mode, the rotor position can be divided into six modes by zero-cross points. The six current application patterns shown above correspond one for one to these six modes. The timing at which the current application patterns are changed (commutation) is out of phase by 30 degrees of electrical angle, with respect to the position detection by an induced voltage. Mode time is obtained by detecting a zero-cross point at some timing and finding an elapsed time from the preceding zero-cross point. Because mode time corresponds to 60 degrees of electrical angle, the following applies for the case illustrated in Figure 13-4. 1. Current on windings changeover (commutation) timing 30 degrees of electrical angle = mode time/2 2. Position detection start timing 3. Failure determination timing
45 degrees of electrical angle = mode time x 3/4 120 degrees of electrical angle = mode time x 2
Timings are calculated in this way. The position detection start timing in 2 is needed to prevent erroneous detection of the induced voltage for reasons that even after current application is turned off, the current continues flowing due to the motor reactance. Control is exercised by calculating the above timings successively for each of the zero-cross points detected six times during 360 degrees of electrical angle and activating commutation, position detection start, and other operations according to that timing. In this way, operations can be synchronized to the phases of the induced voltage of the motor. The timing needed for motor control as in this example can be set freely as desired by using the internal timers of the microcontroller's PMD unit. Also, sine wave control requires controlling the PWM duty cycle for each pulse. Control of PWM duty cycles is accomplished by counting degrees of electrical angle and calculating the sine wave data and voltage data at the counted degree of electrical angle. Page 124
TMP88CS43FG
MCU
Speed control Error handling, etc. PMD circuit Three-phase PWM Protective control Position detection Electrical angle timer Waveform calculation
DC current U, V, W, X, Y, Z CL, EMG PDU, PDV, PDW
DC motor
Power drive Upper phase: u, v, w Lower phase: x, y, z
Figure 13-1 Conceptual Diagram of DC Motor Control
Mode Induced voltage Six-phase output
0
1
Zero crossing
2 U phase
3
4 V phase
5
W phase
U phase H V phase W phase X phase Y phase Z phase Position detection Commutation Position detection start Failure determination
Internal signal
60 30 45 120
L
Figure 13-2 Example of Sensorless DC Motor Control Timing Chart
Page 125
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.2 Configuration of the Motor Control Circuit
The motor control circuit consists of various units. These include a position detection unit to detect the zero-cross points of the induced voltage or position sensor signal, a timer unit to generate events at three instances of electrical angle timing, and a three-phase PWM output unit to produce three-phase output PWM waveforms. Also included are an electrical angle timer unit to count degrees of electrical angle and a waveform arithmetic unit to calculate sinusoidal waveform output duty cycles. The input/output units are configured as shown in the diagram below. When using ports for the PMD function, set the Port input/output control register (P3CRi and P5CRi) to 0 for the input ports, and for the output ports, set the data output latch (P3i and P5i) to 1 and then the port input/output control register to 1. Other input/output ports can be set in the same way for use of the PMD function.
CPU core
Data and address buses
Motor control circuit Timer circuit Electrical angle timer circuit Waveform generation circuit Waveform arithmetic circuit
Position detection circuit
Position signal input
Error detection input
U, V, W, X, Y, Z
Figure 13-3 Block Diagram of the Motor Control Circuit
Note 1: Always use the LDW instruction to set data in the 9, 12 and 16-bit data registers. Note 2: The EMG circuit initially is enabled. For PMD output, fix the EMG input port (P36 and P51) "H" high level or disable the EMG circuit before using for PMD output. Note 3: The EMG circuit initially is enabled. When using Port P3 and P5 as input/output IO ports, disable EMG. Note 4: When going to STOP mode, be sure to turn all of the PMD functions off before entering STOP mode.
Page 126
TMP88CS43FG
13.3 Position Detection Unit
The Position Detection Unit identifies the motor's rotor position from input patterns on the position signal input port. Applied to this position signal input port is the voltage status of the motor windings for the case of sensorless DC motors or a Hall element signal for the case of DC motors with sensors included. The expected patterns corresponding to specific rotor positions are set in the PMD Output Register (MDOUT) beforehand, and when the input position signal and the expected value match as the rotation, a position detection interrupt (INTPDC) is generated. Also, unmatch detection mode is used to detect the direction of motor rotation, where when the status of the position detection input port changes from the status in which it was at start of sampling, a position detection interrupt is generated. For three-phase brushless DC motors, there are six patterns of position signals, one for each mode, as summarized in Table 13-2 from the timing chart in Figure 13-2. Once a predicted position signal pattern is set in the MDOUT register, a position detection interrupt is generated the moment the position signal input port goes to mode indicated by this expected value. The position signals at each phase in the diagram are internal signals which cannot be observed from the outside. Table 13-2 Position Signal Input Patterns
Position Detection Mode Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 U Phase (PDU) H H H L L L V Phase (PDV) L L H H H L W Phase (PDW) H L L L H H
Page 127
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.3.1 Configuration of the position detection unit
PMD output register MDOUT - E,D,C - - - - Position signal expected value Position signal input PDNUM PDU Latch PDV PDW Clock selector 2
Sampling control
Latch
MDOUTsync Coincidence detection Erroneous detection prevention circuit Counter Position detection interrupt INTPDC
fc/4 Sampling control circuit
Reset control
4
2
Timer interrupt INTTMR2/3 PWMON
Delay circuit
SDREG Sampling delay set register
-, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
7, 6 5, 4 3, 2, 1, 0 7, 6, 5, 4 3 2 1 0 PDCRA PDCRB Position detection control register
Figure 13-4 Configuration of the Position Detection Circuit
* The position detection unit is controlled by the Position Detection Control Register (PDCRA, PDCRB). After the position detection function is enabled, the unit starts sampling the position detection port with Timer 2 or in software. For the case of ordinary mode, when the status of the position detection input port matches the expected value of the PMD Output Register, the unit generates a position detection interrupt and finishes sampling, waiting for start of the next sampling. * When unmatch detection mode is selected for position detection, the unit stores the sampled status of the position detection port in memory at the time it started sampling. When the port input status changes from the status in which it was at start of sampling, an interrupt is generated. * In unmatch detection mode, the port status at start of sampling can be read (PDCRC). * When starting and stopping position detection synchronously with the timer, position detection is started by Timer 2 and position detection is stopped by Timer 3. * Sampling mode can be selected from three modes available: mode where sampling is performed only while PWM is on, mode where sensors such as Hall elements are sampled regularly, and mode where sampling is performed while the lower side is conducting current (when performing sampling only while PWM is on, DUTY must be set for all three phases in common). * When sampling mode is selected for detecting position while the lower phases are conducting current, sampling is performed for a period from when the set sampling delay time has elapsed after the lower side started conducting current till when the current application is turned off. Sampling is performed independently at each phase, and the sampling result is retained while sampling is idle. If while sampling at some phase is idle, the input and the expected value at other phase being sampled match, position is detected and an interrupt is generated.
Page 128
TMP88CS43FG
* A sampling delay is provided for use in modes where sampling is made while PWM is on or the lower phases are conducting current. It helps to prevent erroneous detection due to noise that occurs immediately after the transistor turns on, by starting sampling a set time after the PWM signal turned on. * When detecting position while PWM is on or the lower phases are conducting current, a method can be selected whether to recount occurrences of matched position detection after being compared for each PWM signal on (logical sum of three-phase PWM signals) (e.g., starting from 0 in each PWM cycle) or counting occurrences of matching continuously ( PDCRB is used to enable/disable recounting occurrences of matching while PWM is on).
13.3.2 Position Detection Circuit Register Functions
PDCRC Hold result of position detection at PWM edge (Detect position detected position) Monitor sampling status Hold position signal input status These bits hold the comparison result of position detection at falling or rising edge of PWM pulse. Bits 5 and 4 are set to 1 when position is detected at the falling or the rising edge, respectively. They show whether position is detected in the current PWM pulse, during PWM off, or in the immediately preceding PWM pulse. When read, this bit shows the sampling status. This bit holds the status of the position signal input at the time position detection started in unmatch mode.
5, 4
EMEM
3 2 to 0
SMON PDTCT
PDCRB 7, 6 5, 4 SPLCK SPLMD Sampling period Sampling mode Select fc/22, fc/23, fc/24, or fc/25 for the position detection sampling period. Select one of three modes: sampling only when PWM signal is active (when PWM is on), sampling regularly, or sampling when the lower side (X, Y, Z) phases are conducting current. In ordinary mode, when the port status and the set expected value match and continuously match as many times as the sampling counts set, a position detection signal is output and an interrupt is generated. In unmatch detection mode, when the said status and value do not match and continuously unmatch as many times as the sampling counts set, a position detection signal is output and an interrupt is generated.
3 to 0
PDCMP
Sampling count
PDCRA Sampling can be stopped in software by setting this bit to 1 (e.g., by writing to this register). Sampling is performed before stopping and when position detection results match, a position detection interrupt is generated, with sampling thereby stopped. Sampling can be started by setting this bit to 1 (e.g., by writing to this register). Sampling can be stopped by a trigger from Timer 3 by setting this bit to 1. Sampling is performed before stopping and when position detection results match, a position detection interrupt is generated, with sampling thereby stopped. Sampling can be started by a trigger from Timer 3 by setting this bit to 1. Select whether to use three pins (PDU/PDV/PDW) or one pin (PDU only) for position signal input. When one pin is selected, the expected values of PDV and PDW are ignored. When performing position detection with two pins or a pin other than PDU, position signal input can be masked as 0 by setting unused pin(s) for output. When performing sampling while PWM is on, occurrences of matching are recounted each time PWM signal turns on by setting this bit to 1 (when recounting occurrences of matching, the count is reset each time PWM turns off). When this bit is set to 0, occurrences of matching are counted continuously regardless PWM interval. Setting this bit to 0 selects ordinary mode where position is detected when the expected value set in the register and the port input unmatch and then match. Setting this bit to 1 selects unmatch detection mode where position is detected at the time the port status changes to another one from the status in which it was when sampling started. The position detection function is activated by setting this bit to 1.
7
SWSTP
Stop sampling in software
6 5 4
SWSTT SPTM3 STTM2
Start sampling in software Stop sampling using Timer 3 Start sampling using Timer 2 Number of position signal input pins
3
PDNUM
2
RCEN
Recount occurrences of matching when PWM is on
1
DTMD
Position detection mode
0
PDCEN
Position detection function
Page 129
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
SDREG 6 to 0 SDREG Sampling delay Set a time for which to stop sampling in order to prevent erroneous detection due to noise that occurs immediately after PWM output turns on (immediately after the transistor turns on). (Figure 13-5)
PWMON period PWM ON OFF
Position detection match Sampling period Sampling delay Sampling pause Align the arrow to the start of counter switching.
Number of position detection matches (n = 5) Match
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
Figure 13-5 Position Detection Sampling Timing with the PWMON Period Selected
EMEM: Detects when a position detection match has occurred (the value is held aftr position detection). (Check on whether sampling has started on the previous pulse)
PWM CASE1 CASE2 CASE3 CASE4
ON OFF
EMEM value
11
01
10 00
1
Match (Sampling start)
1 1 0 0
0 0 1
11 A match with n = 5 means that it has started on the previous pulse. 01 00 10
Erroneous detection
Figure 13-6 Detection Timing of the Position Detection Position
Page 130
TMP88CS43FG
Position Detection Circuit Registers [Addresses (PMD1 and PMD2)]
PDCRC (01FA2H) (01FD2H) 7 - 6 - 5 EMEM 4 3 SMON 2 1 PDTCT 0 (Initial value: **00 0000)
5, 4
EMEM
Hold result of position detection at PWM edge (Detect position detected position) Monitor sampling status Hold position signal input status
00: Detected in the current pulse 01: Detected while PWM off 10: Detected in the current pulse 11: Detected in the preceding pulse 0: Sampling idle 1: Sampling in progress Holds the status of the position signal input during unmatch detection mode. Bits 2 to 0 correspond to W, V, and U phases. R
3 2 to 0
SMON PDTCT
PDCRB (01FA1H) (01FD1H)
7 SPLCK
6
5 SPLMD
4
3
2 PDCMP
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
00: fc/22 [Hz] (200 ns at 20 MHz) 7, 6 SPLCK Select sampling input clock 01: fc/23 10: fc/24 11: fc/25 (400 ns at 20 MHz) (800 ns at 20 MHz) (1.6 s at 20 MHz) R/W
5, 4
SPLMD
Sampling mode
00: Sample when PWM is on 01: Sample regularly 10: Sample when lower phases conducting current 11: Reserved 1 to 15 times (Counts 0 and 1 are assumed to be one time.)
3 to 0
PDCMP
Position detection matched counts
Note: When changing setting, keep the PDCEN bit reset to "0" (disable position detection function).
PDCRA (01FA0H) (01FD0H)
7 SWSTP
6 SWSTT
5 SPTM3
4 STTM2
3 PDNUM
2 RCEN
1 DTMD
0 PDCEN (Initial value: 0000 0000)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SWSTP SWSTT SPTM3 STTM2 PDNUM RCEN DTMD PDCEN
Stop sampling in software Start sampling in software Stop sampling using Timer 3 Start sampling using Timer 2 Number of position signal input pins Recount occurrences of matching when PWM is on Position detection mode Enable/Disable position detection function
0: No operation 1: Stop sampling 0: No operation 1: Start sampling 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Compare three pins (PDU/PDV/PDW) 1: Compare one pin (PDU) only 0: Continue counting from previously PWM on 1: Recount each time PWM turns on 0: Ordinary mode 1: Unmatch detection mode 0: Disable 1: Enable (Sampling starts)
W
R/W
Note: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the PDCRA because it contains a write only bit.
Page 131
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
SDREG (01FA3H) (01FD3H)
7 -
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: *000 0000)
6 to 0
SDREG
Sampling delay
23/fc x n bits (n = 0 to 6, maximum 50.8 s, resolution of 400 ns at 20 MHz)
R/W
Note: When changing setting, keep the PDCEN bit reset to "0" (disable position detection function).
13.3.3 Outline Processing in the Position Detection Unit
Software Set mode pattern Hardware
Write expected value
MDOUT (E, D, C)
Start position detection Sample position signal input Match with expected value? Yes Increment matching counts Specified count reached? No No
INTTMR2
Timer unit
Interrupt handling Increment mode counts
INTPDC
Yes Generate INTPDC interrupt End of position detection
Page 132
TMP88CS43FG
13.4 Timer Unit
Mode timer control registers MTCRA 7, 6, 5 4, 3, 2, 1 0 Overflow 4 fc/4 Clock selector
Mode timer Timer reset control circuit
Debug output
-
3
7
MTCRB 5 - 3, 2, 1 3 Capture overwrite
Capture control circuit
Capture
Overload protective interrupt INTCLM Position detection interrupt INTPDC
MCAP F to 0 Mode capture register Timer 1 interrupt INTTMR1 (Commutation) CMP1 F to 0 Timer compare register Timer 1 magnitude comparison Timer 2 interrupt INTTMR2 (Position detection start)
CMP2 F to 0
Timer 2 matching comparison
CMP3 F to 0
Timer 3 matching comparison
Timer 3 interrupt INTTMR3 (Overflow)
Figure 13-7 Timer Circuit Configuration
The timer unit has an up counter (mode timer) which is cleared by a position detection interrupt (INTPDC). Using this counter, it can generate three types of timer interrupts (INTTMR1 to 3). These timer interrupts may be used to produce a commutation trigger, position detection start trigger, etc. Also, the mode timer has a capture function which automatically captures register data in synchronism with position detection or overload protection. This capture function allows motor revolutions to be calculated by measuring position detection intervals.
Page 133
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.4.1 Configuration of the Timer Unit
The timer unit consists mainly of a mode timer, three timer comparator, and mode capture register, and is controlled by timer control registers and timer compare registers. * The mode timer can be reset by a signal from the position detection circuit, Timer 3, or overload protective circuit. If the mode timer overflows without being reset, it stops at FFFFH and sets an overflow flag in the control register. * The value of the mode timer during counting can be read by capturing the count in software and reading the capture register. * Timer 1 and Timers 2 and 3 generate an interrupt signal by magnitude comparison and matching comparison, respectively. Therefore, Timer 1 can generate an interrupt signal even when it could not write to the compare register in time and the counter value at the time of writing happens to exceed the register's set value. * When any one of Timers 1 to 3 interrupts occurs, the next interrupts can be enabled by writing a new value to the respective compare registers (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3). * When capturing by position detection is enabled, the capture register has the timer value captured in it each time position is detected. In this way, the capture register always holds the latest value.
Page 134
TMP88CS43FG
13.4.1.1 Timer Circuit Register Functions
MTCRB Debug output can be produced by setting this bit to 1. Because interrupt signals to the interrupt control circuit are used for each interrupt, hardware debugging without software delays are possible. See the debug output diagram (Figure 13-8). Output ports: P67 for PMD1, P77 for PMD2. This bit shows that the timer has overflowed. When this bit is set to 1, the timer value can be captured using the overload protection signal (CL) as a trigger. When this bit is set to 1, the timer value can be captured in software (e.g., by writing to this register). When this bit is set to 1, the timer value can be captured using the position detection signal as a trigger.
7
DBOUT
Debug output
5 3 2 1
TMOF CLCP SWCP PDCCP
Mode timer overflow Capture mode timer by overload protection Capture mode timer in software Capture mode timer by position detection
MTCRA 7, 6, 5 4 3 2 1 TMCK RBTM3 RBCL SWRES RBPDC Select clock Reset mode timer from Timer 3 Reset mode timer by overload protection Reset mode timer in software Reset mode timer by position detection Enable/disable mode timer Select the timer clock. When this bit is set to 1, the mode timer is reset by a trigger from Timer 3. When this bit is set to 1, the mode timer is reset by the overload protection signal (CL) as a trigger. When this bit is set to 1, the mode timer is reset in software (e.g., by writing to this register) When this bit is set to 1, the mode timer is reset by the position detection signal as a trigger. The mode timer is started by setting this bit to 1. Therefore, Timers 1 to 3 must be set with CMP before setting this bit. If this bit is set to 0 after setting CMP, CMP settings become ineffective.
0
TMEN
MCAP
Mode capture
Position detection interval can be read out.
CMP1 CMP2 CMP3
Timer 1 (commutation) Timer 2 (position detection start) Timer 3 (overflow)
Timers 1 to 3 are enabled while the mode timer is operating. An interrupt can be generated once by setting the corresponding bit in this register. The interrupt is disable when an interrupt is generated or the timer is reset. To use the timer again, set the register back again even if data is same.
Timer 1 interrupt (commutation) Timer 2 interrupt (position detection start) Timer 3 interrupt or position detection interrupt Debug output (P67, P77)
Figure 13-8 DBOUT Debug Output Diagram
Page 135
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
Timer Circuit Registers [Addresses (PMD1 and PMD2)]
MTCRB (01FA5H) (01FD5H) 7 DBOUT 6 - 5 TMOF 4 - 3 CLCP 2 SWCP 1 PDCCP 0 - (Initial value: 0*0*0 000*)
7 5 3 2 1
DBOUT TMOF CLCP SWCP PDCCP
Debug output Mode timer overflow Capture mode timer by overload protection Capture mode timer in software Capture mode timer by position detection
0: Disable 1: Enable (P67 for PMD1, P77 for PMD2) 0: No overflow 1: Overflowed 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: No operation 1: Capture 0: Disable 1: Enable
R/W R R/W W R/W
Note: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the MTCRB because it contains a write-only bit.
MTCRA (01FA4H) (01FD4H)
7
6 TMCK
5
4 RBTM3
3 RBCL
2 SWRES
1 RBPDC
0 TMEN (Initial value: 0000 0000)
000: fc/23 (400 ns at 20 MHz) 010: fc/24 (800 ns at 20 MHz) 100: fc/25 (1.6 s at 20 MHz) 7, 6, 5 TMCK Select clock 110: fc/26 (3.2 s at 20 MHz) 001: fc/27 (6.4 s at 20 MHz) 011: Reserved 101: Reserved 111: Reserved 4 3 2 1 0 RBTM3 RBCL SWRES RBPDC TMEN Reset mode timer from Timer 3 Reset mode timer by overload protection Reset mode timer in software Reset mode timer by position detection Enable/disable mode timer 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: No operation 1: Reset 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable timer start W
R/W
R/W
Note 1: When changing MTCRA setting, keep the MTCRA bit reset to "0" (disable mode timer). Note 2: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the MTCRA because it contains a write-only bit.
MCAP (01FA7H, 01FA6H) (01FD7H, 01FD6H)
F DF
E DE
D DD
C DC
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000)
MCAP
Mode capture
Position detection interval
R
CMP1 (01FA9H, 01FA8H) (01FD9H, 01FD8H)
F DF
E DE
D DD
C DC
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000)
CMP2 (01FABH, 01FAAH) (01FDBH, 01FDAH)
F DF
E DE
D DD
C DC
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000)
Page 136
TMP88CS43FG
CMP3 (01FADH, 01FACH) (01FDDH, 01FDCH)
F DF
E DE
D DD
C DC
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000)
CMP1 CMP2 CMP3
Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3
Magnitude comparison compare register Matching comparison compare register Matching comparison compare register R/W
Note: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the MTCRB or MTCRA register because these registers contain write-only bits.
13.4.1.2 Outline Processing in the Timer Unit
Software Interrupt handling Read MCAP Calculate timer set value MCAP 1/2 MCAP 3/4 MCAP 2 Set timer Processing unnecessary
CMP1, CMP2, CMP3 Commutation INTTMR1 To PWM MCAP
Hardtware INTPDC Position detection unit
Start Start Mode timer count up Mode timer MCAP Clear mode timer End Greater than compare 1? No Match with compare 2? No Match with compare 3? No Yes Generate INTTMR1 interrupt Generate INTTMR2 interrupt Generate INTTMR3 interrupt End of timer 1
Processing unnecessary
Position detection start INTTMR2 To the position detection Error determination unit INTTMR3
Yes
End of timer 2
Interrupt handling error handling
Yes
End of timer 3
Page 137
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.5 Three-phase PWM Output Unit
The Three-phase PWM Output Unit has the function to generate three-phase PWM waves with any desired pulse width and the commutation function capable of brushless DC motor control. In addition, it has the protective functions such as overload protection and emergency stop functions necessary to protect the power drive unit, and the dead time adding function which helps to prevent the in-phase upper/lower transistors from getting shorted by simultaneous turn-on when switched over. For the PWM output pin (U,V,W,X,Y,Z), set the port register PxDR and PxCR (x = 3,5) to 1. The PWM output initially is set to be active low, so that if the output needs to be used active high, set up the MDCRA Register accordingly.
13.5.1 Configuration of the three-phase PWM output unit
The three-phase PWM output unit consists of a pulse width modulation circuit, commutation control circuit, protective circuit (emergency stop and overload), and a dead time control circuit.
13.5.1.1 Pulse width modulation circuit (PWM waveform generating unit)
This circuit produces three-phase independent PWM waveforms with an equal PWM frequency. For PWM waveform mode, triangular wave modulation or sawtooth wave modulation can be selected by using the PMD Control Register (MDCRA) bit 1. The PWM frequency is set by using the PMD Period Register (MDPRD). The following shows the relationship between the value of this register and the PWM counter clock set by the MDCRB Register, PWMCK. 1 Sawtooth wave PWM: MDPRD Register set value = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------PWM frequency [ Hz ] x PWMCK 1 Triangular wave PWM: MDPRD Register set value = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PWM frequency [ Hz ] x 2 x P WMCK The PMD Period Register (MDPRD) is comprised of dual-buffers, so that CMPU, V, W Register is updated with PWM period. When the waveform arithmetic circuit is operating, the PWM waveform output unit receives calculation results from the waveform arithmetic circuit and by using the results as CMPU, V, W Register set value, it outputs independent three-phase PWM waveforms. When the waveform calculation function is enabled by the waveform arithmetic circuit and transfer of calculation results into the CMPU to W Registers is enabled (with EDCRA Register bit 2), the CMPU to W Registers are disabled against writing. When the waveform calculation function is enabled (with EDCRA Register bit 1) and transfer of calculation results into the CMPU, V, W Registers is disabled (with EDCRA Register bit 4), the calculation results are transferred to the buffers of CMPU, V, W Registers, but not output to the port. Read-accessing the CMPU, V, and W registers can read the calculation results of the waveform arithmetic circuit that have been input to a buffer. After changing the read calculation result data by software, writing the changed data to the CMPU, V, and W registers enables an arbitrary waveform other than a sinusoidal wave to be output. When the registers are read after writing, the values written to the registers are read out if accessed before the calculation results are transferred after calculation is finished.
Page 138
TMP88CS43FG
[Sawtooth wave]
MDCNT
Data update
[MDPRD] [CMPU] Time PWMU waveform [Triangular wave] On Off MDCNT Data update
[MDPRD] [CMPU] Time On PWMU waveform Off
Figure 13-9 PWM Waveforms
The values of the PWM Compare Registers (CMPU/V/W) and the carrier wave generated by the PWM Counter (MDCNT) are compared for the relative magnitude by the comparator to produce PWM waveforms. The PWM Counter is a 12-bit up/down counter with a 100 ns (at fc = 20 MHz) resolution. For three-phase output control, two methods of generating three-phase PWM waveforms can be set. 1. Three-phase independent mode: Values are set independently in the three-phase PMD Compare Registers to produce three-phase independent PWM waveforms. This method may be used to produce sinusoidal or any other desired drive waveforms. 2. Three-phase common mode: A value is set in only the U-phase PMD Compare Register to produce three in-phase PWM waveforms using the U phase set value. This method may be used for DC motor square wave drive. The three-phase PMD Compare Registers each have a comparison register to comprise a dual-buffer structure. The values of the PMD Compare Registers are loaded into their respective comparison registers synchronously with PWM period.
Page 139
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.5.1.2 Commutation control circuit
Output ports are controlled depending on the contents set in the PMD Output Register (MDOUT). The contents set in this register are divided into two, one for selecting the synchronizing signal for port output, and one for setting up port output. The synchronizing signal can be selected from Timers 1 or 2, position detection signal, or without sync. Port output can be synchronized to this synchronizing signal before being further synchronized to the PWM signal sync. The MDOUT Register's synchronizing signal select bit becomes effective immediately after writing. Other bits are dual-buffered, and are updated by the selected synchronizing signal. Example: Commutation timing for one timer period with PWM synchronization specified
INTTMR
PWM
Commutation
Output on six ports can be set to be active high or active low independently of each other by using the MDCRA Register bits 5 and 4. Furthermore, the U, V, and W phases can individually be selected between PWM output and H/L output by using the MDOUT Register bits A to 8 and 5 to 0. When PWM output is selected, PWM waveforms are output; when H/L output is selected, a waveform which is fixed high or low is output. The MDOUT Register bits E to C set the expected position signal value for the position detection circuit.
PWM control register
MDCRA 7 6 - - 3, 2, 1 0 3
PWM control PWM synchronizing clock Up/Down PWM counter PWM interrupt INTPWM
fc/2
MDCRB 1 to 0
Clock selector Selector/ Latch Selector/ Latch
MDCNT B to 0
Stop MDCNT
PMD period register
MDPRD B to 0
PMD compare register
CMPU B to 0
PWMU Buffer U Three-phase common/ Three-phase
CMPV B to 0
PWMV
Buffer V
CMPW B to 0
PWMW Buffer W
Figure 13-10 Pulse Width Modulation Circuit
Page 140
TMP88CS43FG
PMD output register
- -, -, - B A, 9, 8 7, 6 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
MDOUT
3 PWM synchronizing clock fc/4 S Selector
2
6
Position detection interrupt INTPDC Timer 1 interrupt INTTMR1 Timer 2 interrupt INTTMR2
S Selector
Gate control Set Reset
Latch
MDOUT sync u PWMU x
v PWMV y
w PWMW z
Figure 13-11 Commutation Control Circuit
Dead time register DTR -, -, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 fc/8 u' x'
ON delay circuit ON delay circuit
PMD control register MDCRA --54---U X V Y W Z
v' y'
ON delay circuit
w' z'
Figure 13-12 Dead Time Circuit
Page 141
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.5.2 Register Functions of the Waveform Synthesis Circuit
MDCRB PWMCK Select PWM counter clock Select PWM counter clock.
MDCRA 7 HLFINT Select half-period interrupt When this bit is set to 1, INTPWM is generated every half period (at triangular wave peak and valley) in the case of center PWM output and PINT = 00. In other cases, this setting has no meaning. Select whether to set the duty cycle independently for three phases using the CMPU to W Registers or in common for all three phases by setting the CMPU Register only. Select the upper-phase output port polarity. Make sure the waveform synthesis function (MDCRA Register bit 0) is idle before selecting this port polarity. Select the lower-phase output port polarity. Make sure the waveform synthesis function (MDCRA Register bit 0) is idle before selecting this port polarity. Select the frequency at which to generate a PWM interrupt from four choices available: every PWM period or once every 2, 4, or 8 PWM periods. When setting of this bit is altered while operating, an interrupt may be generated at the time the bit is altered. Select PWM mode. PWM mode 0 is an edge PWM (sawtooth wave), and PWM mode 1 is a center PWM (triangular wave). When enabling this circuit (for waveform output), be sure to set the output port polarity and other bits of this register (other than MDCRA bit 0) beforehand.
6 5 4
DTYMD POLH POLL
DUTY mode Upper-phase port polarity Lower-phase port polarity
3, 2
PINT
PWM interrupt frequency
1 0
PWMMD PWMEN
PWM mode Enable/Disable waveform generation circuit
DTR DTR Dead time Set the dead time between the upper-phase and lower-phase outputs.
MDOUT F UPDWN PWM counter flag This bit indicates whether the PWM counter is counting up or down. When edge PWM (sawtooth wave) is selected, it is always set to 0. Set the data to be compared with the position detection input port. The comparison data is adopted as the expected value simultaneously when port output sync settings made with MDOUT are reflected in the ports. (This is the expected position detection input value for the output set with MDOUT next time.) Select whether or not to synchronize port output to PWM period after being synchronized to the synchronizing signal selected with SYNCS. If selected to be synchronized to PWM, output is kept waiting for the next PWM after being synchronized with SYNCS. Waveform settings are overwritten if new settings are written to the register during this time, and output is generated with those settings. Set U, V, and W-phase port outputs. (See the Table 13-3) Select the synchronizing signal with which to output UVW-phase settings to ports. The synchronizing signal can be selected from Timers 1 or 2, position detection, or asynchronous. Select asynchronous when the initial setting, otherwise the above setting isn't reflected immediately. Set U, V, and W-phase port outputs. (See the Table 13-3)
E, D, C
PDEXP
Mode compare register
B
PSYNC
Select PWM synchronization
A 9 8
WPWM VPWM UPWM
Control UVW-phase PWM outputs
7, 6
SYNCS
Select port output sync signal
5, 4 3, 2 1, 0
WOC VOC UOC
Control UVW-phase outputs
MDCNT
PWM counter
This is a 12-bit read-only register used to count PWM periods.
MDPRD
Set PWM period
This register determines PWM period, and is dual-buffered, allowing PWM period to be altered even while the PWM counter is operating. The buffers are loaded every PWM period. When 100 ns is selected for the PWM counter clock, make sure the least significant bit is set to 0.
Page 142
TMP88CS43FG
CMPU CMPV CMPW
Set PWM pulse width
This comparison register determines the pulse widths output in the respective UVW phases. This register is dual-buffered, and the pulse widths are determined by comparing the buffer and PWM counter.
Waveform Synthesis Circuit Registers [Addresses (PMD1 and PMD2)]
MDCRB (01FAFH) (01FDFH) 7 - 6 - 5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1 PWMCK 0 (Initial value: **** **00)
00: fc/2 [Hz] (100 ns at 20 MHz) 1, 0 PWMCK PWM counterSelect clock 01: fc/22 10: fc/23 11: fc/24 (200 ns at 20 MHz) (400 ns at 20 MHz) (800 ns at 20 MHz) R/W
Note: When changing setting, keep the PWMEN bit reset to "0" (disable wave form synthesis function).
MDCRA (01FAEH) (01FDEH)
7 HLFINT
6 DTYMD
5 POLH
4 POLL
3 PINT
2
1 PWMMD
0 PWMEN (Initial value: 0000 0000)
7 6 5 4
HLFINT DTYMD POLH POLL
Select half-period interrupt DUTY mode Upper-phase port polarity Lower-phase port polarity
0: Interrupt as specified in PINT 1: Interrupt every half period when PINT = 00 0: U phase in common 1: Three phases independent 0: Active low 1: Active high 0: Active low 1: Active high 00: Interrupt every period 01: Interrupt once every 2 periods 10: Interrupt once every 4 periods 11: Interrupt once every 8 periods 0: PWM mode0 (Edge: Sawtooth wave) 1: PWM mode1 (Center: Triangular wave) 0: Disable 1: Enable (Waveform output)
R/W
3, 2
PINT
Select PWM interrupt (trigger)
1 0
PWMMD PWMEN
PWM mode Enable/disable waveform synthesis function
DTR (01FBEH) (01FEEH)
7 -
6 -
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: **00 0000)
5 to 0
DTR
Dead time
23/fc x 6 bit (maximum 25.2 s at 20 MHz)
R/W
Note: When changing setting, keep the MDCRA bit reset to "0" (disable wave form synthesis function).
Page 143
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
MDOUT (01FB3H, 01FB2H) (01FE3H, 01FE2H)
F UPDWN 7 SYNCS
E
D PDEXP
C
B PSYNC
A WPWM 2 VOC
9 VPWM 1 UOC
8 UPWM 0 (Initial value: 00000000 00000000)
6
5 WOC
4
3
F
UPDWN
PWM counter flag Comparison register for position detection Select PWM synchronization W-phase PWM output V-phase PWM output U-phase PWM output
0: Counting up 1: Counting down bit E: W-phase expected value bit D: V-phase expected value bit C: U-phase expected value 0: Asynchronous 1: Synchronized 0: H/L level output 1: PWM waveform output 0: H/L level output 1: PWM waveform output 0: H/L level output 1: PWM waveform output 00: Asynchronous 01: Synchronized to position detection 10: Synchronized to Timer 1 11: Synchronized to Timer 2
R
E, D, C
PDEXP
B A 9 8
PSYNC WPWM VPWM UPWM
R/W
7, 6
SYNCS
Select port output synchronizing signal Control W-phase output Control V-phase output Control U-phase output
5, 4 3, 2 1, 0
WOC VOC UOC
See the table 1-3
13.5.3 Port output as set with UOC/VOC/WOC bits and UPWM/VPWM/WPWM bits
Table 13-3 Example of Pin Output Settings
U-phase output polarity: Active high (POLH,POLL = 1) UPWM UOC 1: PWM output U phase 00 01 10 11
PWM
U-phase output polarity: Active low (POLH,POLL = 0) UPWM UOC 1: PWM output U phase 00 01 10 11 PWM H
PWM PWM
0: H/L level output U phase L L H H X phase L H L H
0: H/L level output U phase H H L L X phase H L H L
X phase PWM PWM L
PWM
X phase
PWM PWM
L PWM PWM
H PWM
Page 144
TMP88CS43FG
MDCNT (01FB5H, 01FB4H) (01FE5H, 01FE4H)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ****000000000000)
B to 0
PWM counter
PWM period counter value
R
MDPRD (01FB7H, 01FB6H) (01FE7H, 01FE6H)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ****000000000000)
B to 0
PWM period
PWM period MDPRD 010H
R/W
CMPU (01FB9H, 01FB8H) (01FE9H, 01FE8H)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ****000000000000)
CMPV (01FBBH, 01FBAH) (01FEBH, 01FEAH)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ****000000000000)
CMPW (01FBDH, 01FBCH) (01FEDH, 01FECH)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ****000000000000)
CMPU B to 0 CMPV CMPW
PWM compare U register PWM compare V register PWM compare W register
Set U-phase duty cycle Set V-phase duty cycle Set W-phase duty cycle R/W
Page 145
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.5.4 Protective Circuit
This circuit consists of an EMG protective circuit and overload protective circuit. These circuits are activated by driving their respective port inputs active.
EMG control register EMGCRB 7 6, 5 4 3, 2, 1, 0 2 4 EMGCRA 7, 6, 5, 4 - 2 1 0 4 Under protection 2 EMG disable code register EMGREL MDOUT A to 0 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 8 EMG protective control Set "0"
Overload protective input CL Timer 1 interrupt INTTMR1 PWM synchronizing clock PWM sync Overload protective interrupt INTCLM Stop MDCNT
CL detection
Reset control
Overload protective control
EMG EMG input INTEMG EMG interrupt
u x v y w z
u' x' v' y' w' z'
Figure 13-13 Configuration of the Protective Circuit
a. EMG protective circuit This protective circuit is used for emergency stop, when the EMG protective circuit is enabled. When the signal on EMG input port goes active (negative edge triggered), the six ports are immediately disabled high-impedance against output and an EMG interrupt (INTEMG) is generated. The EMG Control Register (EMGCRA) is used to set EMG protection. If the EMGCRA shows the value "1" when read, it means that the EMG protective circuit is operating. To return from the EMG protective state, reset the MDOUT Register bits A to 0 and set the EMGCRA to 1. Returning from the EMG protective state is effective when the EMG protective input has been released back high. To disable the EMG function, set data "5AH" and "A5H"sequentially in the EMG disable Register (EMGREL) and reset the EMGCRA to 0. When the EMG function is disabled, EMG interrupts (INTEMG) are not generated. The EMG protective circuit is initially enabled. Before disabling it, fully study on adequacy. b. Overload protective circuit The overload protective circuit is set by using the EMG Control Registers (EMGCRA/B). To activate overload protection, set the EMGCRB to 1 to enable the overload protective circuit. The circuit starts operating when the overload protective input is pulled low. To return from overload state, there are three methods to use: return by a timer (EMGCRB), return by PWM sync (EMGCRB), or return manually (EMGCRB). These methods are usable when the overload protective input has been released back high.
Page 146
TMP88CS43FG
The number of times the overload protective input is sampled can be set by using the EMGCRA. The sampling times can be set in the range of 1 to 15 times at 200 ns period (when fc = 20 MHz). If a low level is detected as many times as the specified number, overload protection is assumed. The output disabled phases during overload protection are set by using the EMGCRB. This facility allows selecting to disable no phases, all phases, PWM phases, or all upper phases/all lower phases. When selected to disable all upper phases/all lower phases, port output is determined by their turn-on status immediately before being disabled. When two or more upper phases are active, all upper phases are turned on and all lower phases are turned off; when two or more lower phases are active, all upper phases are turned off and all lower phases are turned on. When output phase are cut off, output is inactive (low in the case of high active). When the overload protective circuit is disabled, overload protective interrupts (INTCLM) are not generated.
I (Current) EMG setting current Overload protection setting current
Input EMG pin Input CL pin PWM output ("H" active) Overload protection (Output cut off) EMG protection (High-Z output)
t (time)
Figure 13-14 Example of Protection Circuit Operation
Page 147
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.5.5 Functions of Protective Circuit Registers
EMGREL
EMG disable
The EMG protective circuit is disable from the disabled state by writing "5AH" and "A5H" to this register in that order. After that, the EMGCRA Register needs to be set.
EMGCRB Return from overload protective state When this bit is set to 1, the motor control circuit is returned from overload protective state in software (e.g., by writing to this register). Also, the current state can be known by reading this bit. MDOUT outputs at return from the overload protective state remain as set before the overload protective input was driven active. When this bit is set to 1, the motor control circuit is returned from overload protective state by PWM sync. If RTCL is set to 1, RTCL has priority. When this bit is set to 1, the motor control circuit is returned from overload protective state by Timer 1 sync. If RTCL is set to 1, RTCL has priority. The status of overload protection can be known by reading this bit. Select the phases to be disabled against output during overload protection. This facility allows selecting to disable no phases, all phases, PWM phases, or all upper phases/all lower phases. Can stop the PWM counter during overload protection. Enable or disable the overload protective function.
7
RTCL
6 5 4 3, 2
RTPWM RTTM1 CLST CLMD
Return by PWM sync Return by timer sync Overload protective state Select output disabled phases during overload protection Stop counter during overload protection Enable/Disable overload protection
1 0
CNTST CLEN
EMGCRA 7 to 4 2 1 CLCNT EMGST RTE Overload protection sampling time EMG protective state Return from EMG protective state Set the length of time the overload protective input port is sampled. The status of EMG protection can be known by reading this bit. The motor control circuit is returned from EMG protective state by setting this bit to "1" . When returning, set the MDOUT Register A to 0 bits to "0" . Then set the EMGCRA Register bit 1 to "1" and set MDOUT waveform output. Then set up the MDCRA Register. The EMG protective circuit is activated by setting this bit to 1. This circuit initially is enabled. (To disable this circuit, make sure key code 5AH and A5H are written to the EMGREL1 Register beforehand.)
0
EMGEN
Enable/Disable EMG protective circuit
Page 148
TMP88CS43FG
Protective Circuit Registers [Addresses (PMD1 and PMD2)]
EMGREL (01FBFH) (01FEFH) 7 D7 6 D6 5 D5 4 D4 3 D3 2 D2 1 D1 0 D0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
7 to 0
EMGREL
EMG disable
Can disable by writing 5AH and then A5H.
W
Note: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the EMGREL register because this register is write only.
EMGCRB (01FB1H) (01FE1H)
7 RTCL
6 RTPWM
5 RTTM1
4 CLST
3 CLMD
2
1 CNTST
0 CLEN (Initial value: 0000 0000)
7
RTCL
Return from overload protective state Enable/Disable return from overload protective state by PWM sync Enable/Disable return from overload protective state by timer 1 Overload protective state
0: No operation 1: Return from protective state 0: Disable 1: Enable
W
6
RTPWM
R/W 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: No operation 1: Under protection 00: No phases disabled against output 01: All phases disabled against output 10: PWM phases disabled against output 11: All upper/All lower phases disabled against output (Note) 0: Do not stop 1: Stop the counter 0: Disable 1: Enable R/W R
5
RTTM1
4
CLST
3, 2
CLMD
Select output disabled phases during overload protection Stop PWM counter during overload protection Enable/Disable overload protective circuit
1 0
CNTST CLEN
Note: If during overload protection the port output state in two or more upper phases is on, all lower phases are disabled and all upper phases are enabled for output; when two or more lower phases are on, all upper phases are disabled and all lower phases are enabled for output.
EMGCRA (01FB0H) (01FE0H)
7
6 CLCNT
5
4
3
2 EMGST
1 RTE
0 EMGEN (Initial value: 0000 *001)
7 to 4 2 1 0
CLCNT EMGST RTE EMGEN
Overload protection sampling number of times. EMG protective state Return from EMG state Enable/Disable EMG protective circuit
22/fc x n ( n = 1 to 15, 0 and 1 are set as 1 at 20 MHz ) 0: No operation 1: Under protection 0: No operation 1: Return from protective state (Note 1) 0: Disable 1: Enable
R/W R W R/W
Note 1: An instruction specifying a return from the EMG state is invalid if the EMG input is "L". Note 2: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the EMGCRB or EMGCRA register because these registers contain write-only bits.
Page 149
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.6 Electrical Angle Timer and Waveform Arithmetic Circuit
Electrical Angle Timer
fc/8 Clock select and divide circuit 12-bit counter
Reset Position detection
Caputure (EDCAP)
2
Comparator
ELDEG 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Count stop 9-bit electrical angle register
7 - 5, 4 -, -, -, EDCRA
Period register buffer
4-bit counter
Decoder
Period correction circuit
F to C
Correction value (4 bits)
B to 0 EDSET
Electrical angle period (12 bits)
Figure 13-15 Electrical Angle Timer Circuit
Waveform Arithmetic Circuit
AMP B, A, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Voltage set register Electrical angle timer interrupt (INTEDT) Selector (12 bits)
Electrical angle timer (9 bits) Electrical angle RAM 384 bytes Multiplier 12 bits 2-/3-phase modulation switch Selector
ELDEG 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
WFMDR 76543210
Calculation finish
8 bits
3210 EDCRB
-
6 -, - 3 2 1 0 EDCRA
U-phase V-phase W-phase calculation calculation calculation result result result 12 bits 12 bits 12 bits CMPU CMPV CMPW
Figure 13-16 Waveform Arithmetic Circuit
Page 150
TMP88CS43FG
13.6.1 Electrical Angle Timer and Waveform Arithmetic Circuit
The Electrical Angle Timer finishes counting upon reaching the value set by the Period Set Register (EDSET). The Electrical Angle Timer counts 360 degrees of electrical angle in the range of 0 to 383 (17FH) and is cleared to 0 upon reaching 383. In this way, it is possible to obtain the electrical angle of the frequency proportional to the value set by the Period Set Register. The period with which to count up can be corrected by using the Period Correction Register, allowing for fine adjustment of the frequency. The electrical angles counted by the Electrical Angle Timer are presented to the Waveform Arithmetic Circuit. An electrical angle timer interrupt signal is generated each time the Electrical Angle Timer finishes counting. The Waveform Arithmetic Circuit has a sine wave data table, which is used to extract sine wave data based on the electrical angle data received from the Electrical Angle Timer. This sine wave data is multiplied by the value of the Voltage Amplitude Register. For 2-phase modulation, the product obtained by this multiplication is presented to the waveform synthesis circuit. For 3-phase modulation, waveform data is further calculated based on the product of multiplication and the electrical angle data and the value of the PWM Period Register. The calculation is performed each time the Electrical Angle Timer finishes counting or when a value is set in the Electrical Angle Register, and the calculation results consisting of the U phase, the V phase (+120 degrees), and the W phase (+240 degrees) are sequentially presented to the PWM waveform output circuit. The sine wave data table is stored in the RAM and requires initialization. * To correct the period, set the number of times `n' to be corrected in the Period Correction Register (EDSET Register F to C bits). The period is corrected by adding 1 to electrical angle counts 16 for `n' times. For example, when a value 3 is set in the Period Correction Register, the period for 13 times out of electrical angle counts 16 is the value "mH" set in the Period Set Register, and that for 3 times is "m + 1H". (Correction is made almost at equal intervals.) * Because the electrical angle counter (ELDEG) can be accessed even while the Electrical Angle Timer is operating, the electrical angles can be corrected during operation. * The Electrical Angle Capture EDCAP captures the electrical angle value from the Electrical Angle Counter at the time the position is detected. * When the waveform calculation function is enabled, waveform calculation is performed each time the electrical angle counter (ELDEG) are accessed for write or the Electrical Angle Timer finishes counting. * The calculation is performed in 35 machine cycle of execution time, or 7 s (at 20 MHz). * When transfer of calculation result to the CMP Registers is enabled (EDCRA), the calculation results are transferred to the CMPU to W Registers. (This applies only when the waveform calculation function is enabled with the EDCRA.) The CMPU to W Registers are disabled against write while the transfer remains enabled. The calculation results can be read from the CMPU to W Registers while the waveform calculation function remains enabled. * The calculated results can be modified and the modified data can be set in the CMPU to W Registers in software. This makes it possible to output any desired waveform other than sine waves. If a transfer (EDCRA register bit 2) of the calculated results to the CMP register is disabled, readaccessing the CMPU to W registers can read the calculated results. (Before read-accessing these registers, make sure that the calculation is completed.) * To initialize the entire RAM data of the sine wave data table, set the addresses at which to set, sequentially from 000H to 17FH, in the ELDEG Register, and write waveform data to the WFMDR Register each time. Make sure the Waveform Arithmetic Circuit is disabled when writing this data.
Note 1: The value set in the Period Set Register (EDSET Register EDT bits) must be equal to or greater than 010H. Any value smaller than this is assumed to be 010H. Note 2: The sine wave data that is read consists of the U phase, the V phase whose electrical angle is +120 degrees relative to the U phase, and the W phase whose electrical angle is +240 degrees relative to the U phase. Note 3: If a period corresponding to an electrical angle of one degree is shorter than the required calculation time, the previously calculated results are used.
Page 151
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.6.1.1 Functions of the Electrical Angle Timer and Waveform Arithmetic Circuit Registers
EDCRB 3 2 CALCST CALCBSY Start calculation by software Calculation flag Enable/disable calculation start synchronized with electrical angle Electrical angle interrupt Forcefully start calculation. When this bit is written while the waveform arithmetic circuit is calculating, the calculation is terminated and then newly started. By reading this bit, the operation status of the waveform arithmetic circuit can be obtained. Select whether to start calculation when the electrical angle timer finishes counting or when a value is set in the electrical angle register. When disabled, calculation is only started when CALCST is set to 1. Set the electrical angle interrupt signal request timing to either when the electrical angle timer finishes counting or upon end of calculation.
1
EDCALEN
0
EDISEL
EDCRA 7 6 5, 4 EDCNT EDRV EDCK Electrical angle count up/ down Select V-, W-phase Select clock Set whether the electrical angle timer counts up or down. Select phase direction of V-phase and W-phase in relation to U-phase. Select the clock for the electrical angle timer. This setting can be altered even while the electrical angle timer is operating. Select the modulation method with which to perform waveform calculation. Two-phase modulation DATA = ramdata (ELDEG) x AMP 3 C2PEN Switch between 2-phase and 3-phase modulations
MOPRD ramdata ( ELDEG ) x AMP Three-phase modulation: DATA = ---------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------2 2
Note: The sign during 3-phase modulation changes depending on the electrical angle. + for electrical angles 0 to 179 degrees (191) - for electrical angles 180 (192) to 360 (383) degrees
2
RWREN
Auto transfer calculation results to CPM registers
Enable/disable transfer of calculation results by the waveform arithmetic circuit. When the waveform calculation function is enabled while at the same time transfer is enabled, calculation results are set as U, V, and W-phase duty cycles of the PWM generation circuit and are reflected in the ports. Enable/disable the waveform calculation function. Calculations are performed by the waveform arithmetic circuit by enabling the waveform calculation function. When the waveform calculation function is enabled, the calculated results can be read from the U, V, and W-phase compare registers (CMPU, V, W) of the PWM generation circuit. Enable/disable the electrical angle timer. When enabled, the electrical angle timer starts counting; when disabled, the electrical angle timer stops counting and is cleared to 0.
1
CALCEN
Enable/disable waveform calculation function
0
EDTEN
Electrical angle timer
EDSET F to C B to 0 EDTH EDT Correct electrical angle period Electrical angle period Correct the period by adding 1 to electrical angle counts 16 for "n" times. The timer counts the electrical angle period set value "m"'for (16 - n) times and counts (m + 1) for "n" times Set the electrical angle period.
ELDEG
Electrical angle
Read the electrical angle. This register can also be set to initialize or correct the angle while counting. Any value greater than 17FH cannot be set.
AMP
Set voltage amplitude
Set the voltage amplitude. The waveform arithmetic circuit multiplies the data set here by the sine wave data read out from the sine wave RAM. The amplitude has its upper limit determined by the set value of the MDPRD register when performing this multiplication.
EDCAP
Capture electrical angle
Capture the value from the electrical angle timer when the position is detected.
WFMDR
Set sine wave data
To initialize the entire RAM data of the sine wave table, set the addresses at which to set, sequentially from 000H to 17FH, in the ELDEG register, and write waveform data to the WFMDR register each time. Make sure the waveform arithmetic circuit is disabled when writing this data.
Page 152
TMP88CS43FG
Typical Settings of Sine Wave Data
Two-phase modulation 100% Data amplitude 255
0 0 Three-phase modulation 100% Data amplitude 255
64 60
(40H)
128 120
(80H)
192 (C0H) 256 (100H) 320 (140H) 383 (17FH) (ELDEG) 180 240 300 360 Electrical angle
0 0
64 60
(40H)
128 120
(80H)
192 (C0H) 256 (100H) 320 (140H) 383 (17FH) (ELDEG) 180 240 300 360 Electrical angle
Note: During 3-phase modulation, the sign changes at 180 degrees of electrical angle.
Figure 13-17 Typical Settings of Sine Wave Data
Page 153
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
List of the Electrical Angle Timer and Waveform Arithmetic Circuit Registers [Addresses (PMD1 and PMD2)]
EDCRB (01FC1H) (01FF1H) 7 - 6 - 5 - 4 - 3 CALCST 2 CALCBSY 1 EDCALEN 0 EDISEL (Initial value: **** 0000)
3 2
CALCST CALCBSY
Start calculation by software Calculation flag Enable/disable calculation start synchronized with electrical angle Electrical angle interrupt
0: No operation 1: Start calculation 0: Waveform Arithmetic Circuit stopped 1: Waveform Arithmetic Circuit calculating 0: Start calculation insync with electrical angle 1: Do notcalculation insync with electrical angle 0: Interrupt when the Electrical Angle Timer finishes counting 1: Interrupt upon end of calculation
W R
1
EDCALEN
R/W
0
EDISEL
Note: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the EDCRB register because this register is write only.
EDCRA (01FC0H) (01FF0H)
7 EDCNT
6 EDRV
5 EDCK
4
3 C2PEN
2 RWREN
1 CALCEN
0 EDTEN (Initial value: 0000 0000)
7 6
EDCNT EDRV
Electrical angle count up/down Select V-, W-phase
0: Count up 1: Count down 0: V = U + 120, W = U + 240 1: V = U - 120, W = U - 240 00: fc/23 (400 ns at 20 MHz)
5, 4
EDCK
Select clock
01: fc/24 (800 ns at 20 MHz) 10: fc/25 (1.6 s at 20 MHz) 11: fc/26 (3.2 s at 20 MHz) R/W
3 2 1 0
C2PEN RWREN CALC EDTEN
Switch between 2-/3-phase modulations Transfer calculation result to CMP registers Enable/disable waveform calculation function Electrical angleEnable/disable mode timer
0: 2-phase modulation 1: 3-phase modulation 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable
Note: When changing the EDCRA setting, keep the EDCRA bit reset "0" (Disable electrical angle timer).
Page 154
TMP88CS43FG
EDSET (01FC3H, 01FC2H) (01FF3H, 01FF2H)
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6 EDT
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 00000000 00010000)
EDTH
F to C B to 0
EDTH EDT
Correct period (n) Set period (m)
0 to 15 times 010H
R/W
One period of the Electrical Angle Timer, T, is expressed by the equation below. nT = m + ----- x 384 x set clock [ s ] where m = set period, n = period correction 16
ELDEG (01FC5H, 01FC4H) (01FF5H, 01FF4H)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B -
A -
9 -
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: *******0 00000000)
8 to 0
ELDEG
Electrical angle
Set the Initially and the count values of electrical angle.
R/W
AMP (01FC7H, 01FC6H) (01FF7H, 01FF6H)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B DB
A DA
9 D9
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ****0000 00000000)
B to 0
AMP
Set voltage
Set the voltage to be used during waveform calculation.
R/W
EDCAP (01FC9H, 01FC8H) (01FF9H, 01FF8H)
F -
E -
D -
C -
B -
A -
9 -
8 D8
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ******0 00000000)
8 to 0
EDCAP
Captured value of electrical angle
Electrical angle timer value when position is detected.
R
WFMDR (01FCAH) (01FFAH)
7 D7
6 D6
5 D5
4 D4
3 D3
2 D2
1 D1
0 D0 (Initial value: ********)
7 to 0
WFMDR
Sine wave data
Write sine wave data to RAM of sine wave
W
Note: Read-modify-write instructions, such as a bit manipulation instruction, cannot access the WFMDR register because this register is write only.
Page 155
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
13.6.1.2 List of PMD Related Control Registers
(1) Input/output Pins and Input/output Control Registers PMD1 Input/Output Pins (P3, P4) and Port Input/Output Control Registers (P3CR, P4CR)
Name Address Bit 7 P3DR 00003H 6 5 to 0 P4DR P3CR 00004H 01F89H 2 to 0 7 to 0 R or W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Overload protection (CL1) EMG input (EMG1) U1/V1/W1/X1/Y1/Z1 outputs. Position signal inputs (PDU1, PDV1, PDW1). P3 port input/output control (can be set bitwise). 0: Input mode 1: Output mode P0 port input/output control (can be set bitwise). 0: Input mode 1: Output mode Description
P4CR
01F8AH
2, 1, 0
R/W
PMD2 Input/Output Pins (P5, P1) and Port Input/Output Control Registers (P5CR, P1CR)
Name Address Bit 0 P5DR 00005H 1 2 to 7 P1DR P5CR 00001H 01F8BH 5 to 7 7 to 0 R or W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Overload protection (CL2) EMG input (EMG2) U2/V2/W2/X2/Y2/Z2 outputs. Position signal inputs (PDU2, PDV2, PDW2). P3 port input/output control (can be set bitwise). 0: Input mode 1: Output mode P0 port input/output control (can be set bitwise). 0: Input mode 1: Output mode Description
P1CR
0000BH
5, 6, 7
R/W
Note: When using these pins as PMD function or input port, set the Output Latch (P*DR) to 1.
Example of the PMD Pin Port Setting
Input/Output CL1 EMG1 U1 PDU1 Input Input Output Input P3DR * * 1 - P3CR 0 0 1 - P4DR - - - * P4CR - - - 0
Input/Output CL2 EMG2 U2 PDU2 Input Input Output Input
P5DR * * 1 -
P5CR 0 0 1 -
P1DR - - - *
P1CR - - - 0
Page 156
TMP88CS43FG
(2)
Motor Control Circuit Control Registers [Address Upper Stage: PMD1, Lower Stage: PMD2] Position Detection Control Register (PDCR) and Sampling Delay Register (SDREG)
Name
Address
Bit 5, 4
R or W R
Description Detect the position-detected position. 00: Within the current pulse 01: When PWM is off 10: Within the current pulse 11: Within the preceding pulse Monitor the sampling status. 0: Sampling idle 1: Sampling in progress Holds the status of the position signal input during unmatch detection mode. Bits 2, 1, and 0: W, V, and U phases Select the sampling input clock [Hz]. 00: fc/22 10: fc/2
4
PDCRC
01FA2H 01FD2H
3
R
2 to 0
R
7, 6 01FA1H 01FD1H
R/W
01: fc/23 11: fc/25
PDCRB
5, 4
R/W
Sampling mode. 00: When PWM is on 01: Regularly 10: When lower phases are turned on Detection position match counts 1 to 15. 0: No operation 1: Stop sampling in software 0: No operation 1: Start sampling in software Stop sampling using Timer 3. 0: Disable 1: Enable Start sampling using Timer 2. 0: Disable 1: Enable Number of position signal input pins. 0: Compare three pins (PDU/PDV/PDW) 1: Compare one pin (PDU) only Count occurrences of matching when PWM is on. 0: Subsequent to matching counts when PWM previously was on 1: Eecount occurrences of matching each time PWM is on Position detection mode. 0: Ordinary mode 1: Unmatch detection mode Enable/Disable position detection function. 0: Disable 1: Enable (Sampling starts) Sampling delay. 23/fc x n bits (n = 0 to 6, maximum 50.8 s at 20 MHz).
3 to 0 7 6
R/W W W
5
R/W
4 01FA0H 01FD0H
R/W
PDCRA
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
0 01FA3H 01FD3H
R/W
SDREG
6 to 0
R/W
Page 157
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
Mode Timer Control Register (MTCR), Mode Capture Register (MCAP), and Compare Registers (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3)
Name Address Bit 7 R or W R/W Description Debug output. 0: Disable 1: Enable (P67 for PMD1, P77 for PMD2) Mode timer overflow. 0: No overflow 1: Overflowed occurred Capture mode timer by overload protection. 0: Disable 1: Enable Capture mode timer by software. 0: No operation 1: Capture Capture mode timer by position detection. 0: Disable 1: Enable Select clock for mode timer [Hz]. 000: fc/23 (400 ns at 20 MHz) 010: fc/24 (800 ns at 20 MHz) 100: fc/25 (1.6 s at 20 MHz) 7, 6, 5 R/W 110: fc/26 (3.2 s at 20 MHz) 001: fc/27 (6.4 s at 20 MHz) 011: Reserved 101: Reserved 111: Reserved 4 MTCRA 01FA4H 01FD4H 3 R/W R/W Reset timer by Timer 3. 0: Disable 1: Enable Reset timer by overload protection. 0: Disable 1: Enable Reset timer by software. 0: No operation 1: Reset Reset timer by position detection. 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable/Disable mode timer. 0: Disable 1: Enable (timer starts) Mode capture register. Compare Register 1. Compare Register 2. Compare Register 3.
5
R
MTCRB
01FA5H 01FD5H
3
R/W
2
W
1
R/W
2
W
1
R/W
0 01FA7H, 01FA6H 01FD7H, 01FD6H 01FA9H, 01FA8H 01FD9H, 01FD8H 01FABH, 01FAAH 01FDBH, 01FDAH 01FADH, 01FACH 01FDDH, 01FDCH
R/W
MCAP CMP1 CMP2 CMP3
F to 0 F to 0 F to 0 F to 0
R R/W R/W R/W
Page 158
TMP88CS43FG
PMD Control Register (MDCR), Dead Time Register (DTR), and PMD Output Register (MDOUT)
Name Address 01FAFH 01FDFH Bit R or W Description Select clock for PWM counter. 1, 0 R/W 00: fc/2 (100 ns at 20 MHz) 10: fc/2 (400 ns at 20 MHz) 7 R/W
3
MDCRB
01: fc/22 (200 ns at 20 MHz) 11: fc/24 (800 ns at 20 MHz)
Select half-period interrupt 0: Interrupt every period as specified in PINT. 1: Interrupt every half-period only PINT=00. DUTY mode. 0: U phase in common 1: Three phases independent Upper-phase port polarity. 0: Active low 1: Active high Lower-phase port polarity. 0: Active low 1: Active high Select PWM interrupt (trigger). 00: Interrupt once every period 01: Interrupt once 2 periods 10: Interrupt once 4 periods 11: Interrupt once 8 periods PWM mode. 0: PWM mode0 (edge: sawtooth wave) 1: PWM mode1 (center: triangular wave) Enable/disable waveform synthesis function. 0: Disable 1: Enable (waveform output) Set dead time. 23/fc x 6bit (maximum 25.2 s at 20 MHz). 0: Count up 1: Count down Comparison register for position detection. 6: W 5: V 4: U Select PWM synchronization. 0: Asynchronous with PWM period 1: Synchronized W-phase PWM output. 0: H/L level output 1: PWM waveform output V-phase PWM output. 0: H/L level output 1: PWM waveform output U-phase PWM output. 0: H/L level output 1: PWM waveform output Select port output synchronizing signal. 00: Asynchronous 01: Synchronized to position detection 10: Synchronized to Timer 1 11: Synchronized to Timer 2 Control W-phase output Control V-phase output Control U-phase output
6
R/W
5
R/W
MDCRA
01FAEH 01FDEH
4
R/W
3, 2
R/W
1
R/W
0 01FBEH 01FEEH
R/W
DTR
5 to 0 F
R/W R
E, D, C
R/W
B
R/W
A
R/W
MDOUT
01FB3H, 01FB2H 01FE3H, 01FE2H
9
R/W
8
R/W
7, 6
R/W
5, 4 3, 2 1, 0
R/W R/W R/W
Page 159
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
PWM Counter (MDCNT), PMD Period Register (MDPRD), and PMD Compare Registers (CMPU, CMPV, CMPW)
Name MDCNT MDPRD CMPU CMPV CMPW Address 01FB5H, 01FB4H 01FE5H, 01FE4H 01FB7H, 01FB6H 01FE7H, 01FE6H 01FB9H, 01FB8H 01FE9H, 01FE8H 01FBBH, 01FBAH 01FEBH, 01FEAH 01FBDH, 01FBCH 01FEDH, 01FECH Bit B to 0 B to 0 B to 0 B to 0 B to 0 R or W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Read the PWM period counter value. PWM period MDPRD 010H. Set U-phase PWM duty cycle. Set V-phase PWM duty cycle. Set W-phase PWM duty cycle.
EMG Disable Code Register (EMGREL) and EMG Control Register (EMGCR)
Name EMGREL Address 01FBFH 01FEFH Bit 7 to 0 R or W W Description Code input for disable EMG protection circuit. Can be disable by writing 5AH and then A5H. Return from overload protective state. 0: No operation 1: Return from protective state Condition for returning from overload protective state: Synchronized to PWM. 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable/Disable return from overload protective state by timer 1. 0: Disable 1: Enable Overload protective state. 0: No operation 1: Under protection Select output disabled phases during overload protection. 00: No phases disabled against output 01: All phases disabled against output 10: PWM phases disabled against output 11: All upper/All lower phases disabled against output Stop PWM counter (MDCNT) during overload protection. 0: Do not stop 1: Stop Enable/Disable overload protective circuit. 0: Disable 1: Enable Overload protection sampling time. 22/fc x n (n = 1 to 15, at 20 MHz) EMG protective state. 0: No operation 1: Under protection Return from EMG protective state. 0: No operation 1: Return from protective state Enable/Disable fanction of the EMG protective circuit. 0: Disable 1: Enable (This circuit initially is enabled (= 1). To disable this circuit, make sure key code 5AH and A5H are written to the EMGREL1 Register beforehand.)
7
W
6
R/W
5
R/W
EMGCRB
01FB1H 01FE1H
4
R
3, 2
R/W
1
R/W
0
R/W
7 to 4
R/W
2
R
EMGCRA
01FB0H 01FE0H
1
W
0
R/W
Page 160
TMP88CS43FG
Electrical Angle Control Register (EDCR), Electrical Angle Period Register (EDSET), Electrical Angle Set Register (ELDEG), Voltage Set Register (AMP), and Electrical Angle Capture Register (EDCAP).
Name Address Bit 3 2 1 0 7 6 R or W W R R/W R/W R/W R/W 0: No operation 1: Start calculation 0: Waveform Arithmetic Circuit stopped 1: Waveform Arithmetic Circuit calculatin 0: Start calculation insync with electrical angle 1: Do not calculation insync with electrical angle 0: Interrupt when the Electrical Angle Timer finishes counting 1: Interrupt upon end of calculation 0: Count up 1: Count down 0: V = U + 120, W = U + 240 1: V = U - 120, W = U - 240 Select clock. 5, 4 R/W 00: fc/23 10: fc/2 3 R/W
5
Description
EDCRB
01FC1H 01FF1H
01: fc/24 11: fc/26
EDCRA
01FC0H 01FF0H
Switch between 2/3-phase modulations. 0: Two-phase modulation 1: Three-phase modulation Transfer calculation result to CMP registers. 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable/disable waveform calculation function. 0: Disable 1: Enable Electrical angle timer. 0: Disable 1: Enable Correct period (n) 0 to 15 times. Set period (1/m counter) 010H Initially set and count values of electrical angle. Set voltage used during waveform calculation. Electrical angle timer value when position is detected. Set sine wave data.
2
R/W
1
R/W
0 F to C B to 0 8 to 0 B to 0 8 to 0 7 to 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R W
EDSET
01FC3H, 01FC2H 01FF3H, 01FF2H 01FC5H, 01FC4H 01FF5H, 01FF4H 01FC7H, 01FC6H 01FF7H, 01FF6H 01FC9H, 01FC8H 01FF9H, 01FF8H 01FCAH 01FFAH
ELDEG AMP EDCAP WFMDR
Page 161
13. Motor Control Circuit (PMD: Programmable motor driver)
TMP88CS43FG
Page 162
TMP88CS43FG
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART)
The TMP88CS43FG has a asynchronous serial interface (UART) . It can connect the peripheral circuits through TXD and RXD pin. TXD and RXD pin are also used as the general port. For TXD pin, the corresponding general port should be set output mode (Set its output control register to "1" after its output port latch to "1"). For RXD pin, should be set input mode. The asynchronous serial interface (UART) can select the connection pin with the peripheral circuits. RXD1 and TXD1 are correspond to P44 and P45 pins, RXD2 and TXD2 are to P00 and P01 pins. But the synchronous serial interface (SIO) also use P44 and P45 pins, therefore these P44 and P45 are not available for UART when SIO is on working.
14.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UARTCRA
Transmit data buffer
TDBUF
Receive data buffer
RDBUF
3
2
Receive control circuit Transmit control circuit
2
Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit M P X M P X
INTTXD
RXD1 RXD2 TXD1 TXD2
INTRXD
IrDA control
Transmit/receive clock
IRDACR IrDA output control register
Y S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC4
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
M P X
A B C S 2
fc/26 7 fc/2 fc/28
2 Y Counter
UARTSR
4
UARTCRB
UARTSEL UART pin select register MPX: Multiplexer
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2
Figure 14-1 UART (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 163
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART)
14.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
14.2 Control
UART is controlled by the UART Control Registers (UARTCRA, UARTCRB). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UARTSR). TXD pin and RXD pin can be selected a port assignment by UART Pin Select Register (UARTSEL). UART Control Register1
UARTCRA (01F91H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 Input INTTC4 fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting UARTCRA bits to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UARTCRA and UARTCRA should be set to "0" before UARTCRA is changed. Note 4: In case fc = 20MHz, the timer counter 4 (TC4) is available as a baud rate generator.
UART Control Register2
UARTCRB (01F92H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejectio time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UARTCRB = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UARTCRB = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UARTCRB = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 164
TMP88CS43FG
UART Status Register
UARTSR (01F91H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART Receive Data Buffer
RDBUF (01F93H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART Transmit Data Buffer
TDBUF (01F93H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART Pin Select Register
UARTSEL (01F90H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TXD SEL 0 RXD SEL (Initial value: **** **00)
RXDSEL TXDSEL
RXD connect pin select TXD connect pin select
0: 1: 0: 1:
RXD1 RXD2 TXD1 TXD2
R/W
Note 1: Do not change UARTSEL register during UART operation. Note 2: Set UARTSEL register before performing the setting terminal of a I/O port when changing a terminal.
Page 165
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART)
14.3 Transfer Data Format TMP88CS43FG
14.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UARTCRA), and parity (Select parity in UARTCRA; even- or odd-numbered parity by UARTCRA) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 14-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 14-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 14-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 166
TMP88CS43FG
14.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART is set of UARTCRA. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 14-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200
When INTTC4 is used as the UART transfer rate (when UARTCRA = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC4 source clock [Hz] / TC4DR setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
14.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UARTCRA until a start bit is detected in RXD pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 14-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 167
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART)
14.6 STOP Bit Length TMP88CS43FG
14.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UARTCRA.
14.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UARTCRA and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UARTCRA.
14.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
14.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UARTCRA to "1". Read UARTSR to check UARTSR = "1", then write data in TDBUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TDBUF zero-clears UARTSR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UARTCRA and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCRA. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1" and an INTTXD interrupt is generated. While UARTCRA = "0" and from when "1" is written to UARTCRA to when send data are written to TDBUF, the TXD pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UARTSR, then write data in TDBUF. Otherwise, UARTSR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
14.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UARTCRA to "1". When data are received via the RXD pin, the receive data are transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UARTSR is set and an INTRXD interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCRA. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RDBUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UARTCRA bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 168
TMP88CS43FG
14.9 Status Flag
14.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears PERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 14-5 Generation of Parity Error 14.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears FERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 14-6 Generation of Framing Error 14.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RDBUF, overrun error flag UARTSR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RDBUF are not affected. The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
Page 169
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART)
14.9 Status Flag TMP88CS43FG
UARTSR
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UARTSR
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears OERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 14-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UARTSR is cleared.
14.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RDBUF sets receive data buffer full flag UARTSR to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears RBFL.
UARTSR
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 14-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UARTSR is set during the period between reading the UARTSR and reading the RDBUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RDBUF. Therefore, after reading the RDBUF, read the UARTSR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
14.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TDBUF, that is, when data in TDBUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the TDBUF is written after reading the UARTSR.
Page 170
TMP88CS43FG
Data write
TDBUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UARTSR After reading UARTSR writing TDBUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 14-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 14.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TDBUF (UARTSR = "1"), transmit end flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is stated after writing the TDBUF.
Shift register
TXD pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TDBUF
Start
Bit 0
UARTSR
UARTSR
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 14-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 171
14. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART)
14.9 Status Flag TMP88CS43FG
Page 172
TMP88CS43FG
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
The TMP88CS43FG has a clocked-synchronous 8-bit serial interface. Serial interface has an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. Serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via SO, SI, SCK port.
15.1 Configuration
SIO control / status register
SIOSR
SIOCR1
SIOCR2
CPU
Control circuit
Buffer control circuit Shift register Shift clock
Transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in DBR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Serial data output 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer
SI
Serial data input
INTSIO interrupt request
Serial clock
SCK
Serial clock I/O
Figure 15-1 Serial Interface
Page 173
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
15.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
15.2 Control
The serial interface is controlled by SIO control registers (SIOCR1/SIOCR2). The serial interface status can be determined by reading SIO status register (SIOSR). The transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the SIOCR2. The data buffer is assigned to address 01F98H to 01F9FH for SIO in the DBR area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. When the specified number of words has been transferred, a buffer empty (in the transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or transmit/receive mode) interrupt (INTSIO) is generated. When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock for each word transferred. Four different wait times can be selected with SIOCR2. SIO Control Register 1
SIOCR1 (1F96H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 4 SIOM 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS
Indicate transfer start / stop
0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 010:
Stop Start Continuously transfer Abort transfer (Automatically cleared after abort) 8-bit transmit mode 4-bit transmit mode 8-bit transmit / receive mode 8-bit receive mode 4-bit receive mode Except the above: Reserved NORMAL, IDLE mode DV1CK = 0 000 001 010 fc/2
13
SIOINH
Continue / abort transfer
Write only
SIOM
Transfer mode select
100: 101: 110:
DV1CK = 0 fc/214 fc/29 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 Reserved Write only
fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24
SCK
Serial clock select 011 100 101 110 111
External clock (Input from SCK pin)
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Set SIOCR1 to "0" and SIOCR1 to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. Note 3: SIOCR1 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Control Register 2
SIOCR2 (1F97H) 7 6 5 4 WAIT 3 2 1 BUF 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
Page 174
TMP88CS43FG
Always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. 00: WAIT Wait control 01: 10: 11: 000: 001: 010: BUF Number of transfer words (Buffer address in use) 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: Tf = TD(Non wait) Tf = 2TD(Wait) Tf = 4TD(Wait) Tf = 8TD (Wait) 1 word transfer 2 words transfer 3 words transfer 4 words transfer 5 words transfer 6 words transfer 7 words transfer 8 words transfer 01F98H 01F98H ~ 01F99H 01F98H ~ 01F9AH 01F98H ~ 01F9BH 01F98H ~ 01F9CH 01F98H ~ 01F9DH 01F98H ~ 01F9EH 01F98H ~ 01F9FH Write only
Note 1: The lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit transfers. Zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. Note 2: Transmitting starts at the lowest address. Received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( The first buffer address transmitted is 01F98H ). Note 3: The value to be loaded to BUF is held after transfer is completed. Note 4: SIOCR2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (SIOF = 0). Note 5: *: Don't care Note 6: SIOCR2 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc. Note 7: Tf; Frame time, TD; Data transfer time
(output)
SCK output
TD Tf
Figure 15-2 Frame time (Tf) and Data transfer time (TD)
SIO Status Register
SIOSR (1F97H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 00** ****)
SIOF SEF
Serial transfer operating status monitor Shift operating status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Transfer terminated Transfer in process Shift operation terminated Shift operation in process
Read only
Note 1: After SIOCR1 is cleared to "0", SIOSR is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of SIOCR1 to "1".
15.3 Serial clock
15.3.1 Clock source
Internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by SIOCR1.
Page 175
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
15.3 Serial clock TMP88CS43FG
15.3.1.1 Internal clock
Any of six frequencies can be selected. The serial clock is output to the outside on the SCK pin. The SCK pin goes high when transfer starts. When data writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wait function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. Table 15-1 Serial Clock Rate
NORMAL, IDLE mode SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Clock fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External Baud Rate 2.44 Kbps 78.13 Kbps 156.25 Kbps 312.50 Kbps 625.00 Kbps 125.00 Kbps External
Note: 1 Kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 20 MHz)
Automatically wait function
SCK
pin (output)
SO
pin (output) Written transmit data a
a0
a1
a2
a3 b
b0
b1 c
b2
b3
c0
c1
Figure 15-3 Automatic Wait Function (at 4-bit transmit mode)
15.3.1.2 External clock
An external clock connected to the SCK pin is used as the serial clock. In this case, the SCK (P43) port should be set to input mode. To ensure shifting, a pulse width of more than 24/fc is required. This pulse is needed for the shift operation to execute certainly. Actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. The minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the program.
SCK
pin (Input)
tSCKL tSCKH
tSCKL, tSCKH > 24/fc
Figure 15-4 External clock pulse width
Page 176
TMP88CS43FG
15.3.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit, and the trailing edge is used to receive.
15.3.2.1 Leading edge
Transmitted data are shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK pin input/ output).
15.3.2.2 Trailing edge
Received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK pin input/output).
SCK pin
SO pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
3210
*321
**32
***3
(a) Leading edge
SCK pin
SI pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
****
0***
10**
210*
3210
*; Don't care
(b) Trailing edge
Figure 15-5 Shift edge
15.4 Number of bits to transfer
Either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. When 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer register are used. The upper 4 bits are cleared to "0" when receiving. The data is transferred in sequence starting at the least significant bit (LSB).
15.5 Number of words to transfer
Up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial transfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial transfer) of data can be transferred continuously. The number of words to be transferred can be selected by SIOCR2. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. If the number of words is to be changed during transfer, the serial interface must be stopped before making the change. The number of words can be changed during automatic-wait operation of an internal clock. In this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped.
Page 177
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
15.6 Transfer Mode TMP88CS43FG
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
INTSIO interrupt
(a) 1 word transmit
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(b) 3 words transmit
SCK pin
SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(c) 3 words receive
Figure 15-6 Number of words to transfer (Example: 1word = 4bit)
15.6 Transfer Mode
SIOCR1 is used to select the transmit, receive, or transmit/receive mode.
15.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes
In these modes, firstly set the SIO control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transferred) to the data buffer registers (DBR). After the data are written, the transmission is started by setting SIOCR1 to "1". The data are then output sequentially to the SO pin in synchronous with the serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (LSB). As soon as the LSB has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. When the final data bit has been transferred and the data buffer register is empty, an INTSIO (Buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. When the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer register by the time the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transmitted. Writing even one word of data cancels the automatic-wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the next word before transmission of the previous word is completed.
Note:Automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a DBR not being used as a transmit data buffer register; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications. For example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the DBR of the remained 5 words.
When an external clock is used, the data must be written to the data buffer register before shifting next data. Thus, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. The transmission is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer empty interrupt service program. Page 178
TMP88CS43FG
SIOCR1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. That the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR because SIOSR is cleared to "0" when a transfer is completed. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". When an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear SIOCR1 to "0" before shifting the next data; If SIOCR1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. If it is necessary to change the number of words, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0".
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 15-7 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Input) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 15-8 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, External clock)
Page 179
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
15.6 Transfer Mode TMP88CS43FG
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
MSB of last word
tSODH = min 3.5/fc [s] (In the NORMAL, IDLE modes)
Figure 15-9 Transmiiied Data Hold Time at End of Transfer 15.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes
After setting the control registers to the receive mode, set SIOCR1 to "1" to enable receiving. The data are then transferred to the shift register via the SI pin in synchronous with the serial clock. When one word of data has been received, it is transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (DBR). When the number of words specified with the SIOCR2 has been received, an INTSIO (Buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. The data are then read from the data buffer registers by the interrupt service program. When the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. A wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read.
Note:Waits are also canceled by reading a DBR not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications.
When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. If the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to the data buffer register and the receiving of any more data will be canceled. When an external clock is used, the maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is generated and when the data received have been read. The receiving is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer full interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been received. That the receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the receiving is ended. After confirmed the receiving termination, the final receiving data is read. When SIOCR1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". (The received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0" then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data receiving, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out.
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Page 180
TMP88CS43FG
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO Interrupt
DBR
a
Read out
b
Read out
Figure 15-10 Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock) 15.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode
After setting the SIO control register to the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (DBR). After that, enable the transmit/receive by setting SIOCR1 to "1". When transmitting, the data are output from the SO pin at leading edges of the serial clock. When receiving, the data are input to the SI pin at the trailing edges of the serial clock. When the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transferred. Usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. The data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always write the data to be transmitted after reading the all received data. When the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. A wait will not be initiated if even one transfer data word has been written. When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift operation. When an external clock is used, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between generation of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. The transmit/receive operation is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in INTSIO interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the transmitting/receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been transmitted. That the transmitting/receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the transmitting/receiving is ended. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/receive operation, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data.
Page 181
15. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
15.6 Transfer Mode TMP88CS43FG
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (output) SO pin
a0 c0
a1 c1
a2 c2
a3 c3
a4 c4
a5 c5
a6 c6
a7 c7
b0 d0
b1 d1
b2 d2
b3 d3
b4 d4
b5 d5
b6 d6
b7 d7
SI pin
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write (a) Read out (c)
c
b
Write (b)
d
Read out (d)
Figure 15-11 Transfer / Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
Bit 6
Bit 7 of last word
tSODH = min 4/fc [s] (In the NORMAL, IDLE modes)
Figure 15-12 Transmitted Data Hold Time at End of Transfer / Receive
Page 182
TMP88CS43FG
16. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP88CS43FG have a 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
16.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 10-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 16-1. It consists of control register ADCCRA and ADCCRB, converted value register ADCDRH and ADCDRL, a DA converter, a sample-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VAREF AVSS
R/2
AVDD
R Reference voltage
R/2
Analog input multiplexer
AIN0
Sample hold circuit
A
Y 10 Analog comparator
AIN15
n S EN IREFON 4 SAIN ADRS AINDS
Successive approximate circuit Shift clock Control circuit 2 AMD 3 ACK ADCCRB 8 ADCDRH 2 INTADC
EOCF ADBF
ADCCRA
ADCDRL
AD converter control register 1, 2
AD conversion result register 1, 2
Note: Before using AD converter, set appropriate value to I/O port register conbining a analog input port. For details, see the section on "I/O ports".
Figure 16-1 10-bit AD Converter
Page 183
16. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
16.2 Register configuration TMP88CS43FG
16.2 Register configuration
The AD converter consists of the following four registers: 1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCRA) This register selects the analog channels and operation mode (Software start or repeat) in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating. 2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCRB) This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (Ladder resistor network). 3. AD converted value register 1 (ADCDRH) This register used to store the digital value after being converted by the AD converter. 4. AD converted value register 2 (ADCDRL) This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter. AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCRA (0026H) 7 ADRS 6 AMD 5 4 AINDS 3 2 SAIN 1 0 (Initial value: 0001 0000)
ADRS
AD conversion start
0: 1: 00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
AD conversion start AD operation disable Software start mode Reserved Repeat mode Analog input enable Analog input disable AIN0 AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 AIN4 AIN5 AIN6 AIN7 AIN8 AIN9 AIN10 AIN11 AIN12 AIN13 AIN14 AIN15
AMD
AD operating mode
AINDS
Analog input control
R/W
SAIN
Analog input channel select
Note 1: Select analog input channel during AD converter stops (ADCDRL = "0"). Note 2: When the analog input channel is all use disabling, the ADCCRA should be set to "1". Note 3: During conversion, Do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog input port use as general input port. And for port near to analog input, Do not input intense signaling of change. Note 4: The ADCCRA is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. Note 5: Do not set ADCCRA newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCRA newly again, check ADCDRL to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). Note 6: After STOP mode is started, AD converter control register1 (ADCCRA) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCRA newly after returning to NORMAL mode. Note 7: After RESET, ADCCRA is initialized Reserved setting. Therfore, set the appropriate analog input channel to ADCCRA when use AD converter. Note 8: After ADCCRA is set to 00H, AD conversion can not be started for four cycles. Thus, four NOPs must be inserted before setting the ADCCRA.
Page 184
TMP88CS43FG
AD Converter Control Register 2
ADCCRB (0027H) 7 6 5 IREFON 4 "1" 3 2 ACK 1 0 "0" (Initial value: **0* 000*)
IREFON
DA converter (Ladder resistor) connection control
0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Connected only during AD conversion Always connected 39/fc Reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc Reserved
ACK
AD conversion time select (Refer to the following table about the conversion time)
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit0 in ADCCRB to "0" and set bit4 in ADCCRB to "1". Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCRB, bit6 to 7 in ADCCRB read in as undefined data. Note 3: After STOP mode is started, AD converter control register2 (ADCCRB) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCRB newly after returning to NORMAL mode.
Table 16-1 ACK setting and Conversion time (at CGCR="0")
Condition ACK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s Conversion time 39/fc 20 MHz Reserved 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 16 MHz 8 MHz -
Reserved
Table 16-2 ACK setting and Conversion time (at CGCR="1")
Condition ACK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s Conversion time 39/fc 20 MHz Reserved 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 16 MHz 8 MHz -
Reserved
Note 1: Setting for "-" in the above table are inhibited.
fc: High Frequency oscillation clock [Hz]
Note 2: Set conversion time setting should be kept more than the following time by Analog reference voltage (VAREF).
VAREF = 4.5 to 5.5 V 15.6 s and more
Page 185
16. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
16.2 Register configuration TMP88CS43FG
AD Converted value Register 1
ADCDRH (0029H) 7 AD09 6 AD08 5 AD07 4 AD06 3 AD05 2 AD04 1 AD03 0 AD02 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Converted value Register 2
ADCDRL (0028H) 7 AD01 6 AD00 5 EOCF 4 ADBF 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
EOCF ADBF
AD conversion end flag AD conversion BUSY flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Before or during conversion Conversion completed During stop of AD conversion During AD conversion
Read only
Note 1: The ADCDRL is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDRH. Therfore, the AD conversion result should be read to ADCDRL more first than ADCDRH. Note 2: The ADCDRL is set to "1" when AD conversion starts, and cleared to "0" when AD conversion finished. It also is cleared upon entering STOP mode. Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDRL, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable.
Page 186
TMP88CS43FG
16.3 Function
16.3.1 Software Start Mode
After setting ADCCRA to "01" (software start mode), set ADCCRA to "1". AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCRA is thereby started. After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDRH, ADCDRL) and at the same time ADCDRL is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. ADRS is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCRA newly again (Restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCRA newly again, check ADCDRL to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start ADCCRA AD conversion start
ADCDRL
ADCDRH status
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
ADCDRL
INTADC interrupt request ADCDRH Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
ADCDRL
Figure 16-2 Software Start Mode 16.3.2 Repeat Mode
AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCRA is performed repeatedly. In this mode, AD conversion is started by setting ADCCRA to "1" after setting ADCCRA to "11" (Repeat mode). After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDRH, ADCDRL) and at the same time ADCDRL is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. In repeat mode, each time one AD conversion is completed, the next AD conversion is started. To stop AD conversion, set ADCCRA to "00" (Disable mode) by writing 0s. The AD convert operation is stopped immediately. The converted value at this time is not stored in the AD converted value register.
Page 187
16. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
16.3 Function TMP88CS43FG
ADCCRA AD conversion start ADCCRA
"11"
"00"
Conversion operation
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
3rd conversion result
AD convert operation suspended. Conversion result is not stored.
3rd conversion result
ADCDRH,ADCDRL
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
ADCDRL EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
INTADC interrupt request ADCDRH ADCDRL Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
Conversion result read Conversion result read
Figure 16-3 Repeat Mode 16.3.3 Register Setting
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCRA) as follows: * Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN). * Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS). * Specify AMD for the AD converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode). 2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCRB) as follows: * Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Figure 16-1, Figure 16-2 and AD converter control register 2. * Choose IREFON for DA converter control. 3. After setting up (1) and (2) above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1 (ADCCRA) to "1". If software start mode has been selected, AD conversion starts immediately. 4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDRH) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted value register 2 (ADCDRL) is set to "1", upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated. 5. EOCF is cleared to "0" by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is completed.
Page 188
TMP88CS43FG
Example :After selecting the conversion time 15.6 s at 20 MHz and the analog input channel AIN4 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009EH and store the upper 8 bits in address 0009FH in RAM. The operation mode is software start mode.
: (port setting) : LD LD : : (ADCCRA) , 00100100B (ADCCRB) , 00011000B ;Set port register approrriately before setting AD converter registers. (Refer to section I/O port in details) ; Select Software start mode, Analog input enable, and AIN4 ;Select conversion time(312/fc) and operation mode
SET SLOOP : TEST JRS
(ADCCRA) . 7 (ADCDRB) . 5 T, SLOOP
; ADRS = 1(AD conversion start) ; EOCF= 1 ?
LD LD LD LD
A , (ADCDRL) (9EH) , A A , (ADCDRH) (9FH), A
; Read result data
; Read result data
16.4 STOP mode during AD Conversion
When standby mode (STOP mode) is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCRA and ADCCRB are initialized to initial value). Also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering standby mode (STOP mode).) When restored from standby mode (STOP mode), AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion. Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage.
Page 189
16. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
16.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result TMP88CS43FG
16.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 16-4.
3FFH 3FEH 3FDH AD conversion result 03H 02H 01H
VAREF AVSS
0
1
2
3 1021 1022 1023 1024 Analog input voltage
1024
Figure 16-4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (Typ.)
Page 190
TMP88CS43FG
16.6 Precautions about AD Converter
16.6.1 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN15) are used at voltages within VAREF to AVSS. If any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
16.6.2 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN15) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
16.6.3 Noise Countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 16-5. The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
Internal resistance AINi Permissible signal source impedance
5 k (max) 5 k (typ)
Analog comparator
Internal capacitance
C = 22 pF (typ.)
DA converter
Note) i = 15 to 0
Figure 16-5
Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 191
16. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
16.6 Precautions about AD Converter TMP88CS43FG
Page 192
TMP88CS43FG
17. 8-Bit High-speed PWM (HPWM0 and HPWM1)
The TMP88CS43FG contains two-channels of high-speed PWM. The high-speed PWM works in such a way that when data are written to the data registers for the respective channels, waveforms differing from each other can be output. The high-speed PWM is shared with ports, P02 (HPWM0) and P03 (HPWM1). When using these pins for highspeed PWM, set the port output latches for P02 and P03 to 1.
17.1 Configuration
HPWM0 X1 fc 8-bit up counter HPE0 HPE1 PWMST Comparator Additional Pulse Generator circuit HPE1 HPE0 PWMMOD HPWMCR Hight-speed PWM control register HPWMDR0 Data register HPWMDR1 Data register HPWM0 section HPWM1 section HPWM1
Figure 17-1 High-speed PWM (HPWM0 and HPWM1)
Page 193
17. 8-Bit High-speed PWM (HPWM0 and HPWM1)
17.2 Control TMP88CS43FG
17.2 Control
Control Register
HPWMCR (000CH) 7 HPE1 6 HPE0 5 4 3 PWMST 2 1 0 R/W (Initial value: 00** 0*00) PWMMOD
PWMMOD
Select PWM mode
00: Mode 0 (8 bits) 01: Mode 1 (7 bits) 10: Mode 2 (6 bits) 11: Reserved 0: STOP 1: RUN 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable R/W
PWMST HPE0 HPE1
Run/stop 8-bit up counter Control HPWM0 output Control HPWM1 output
Data Register
HPWMDR0 (000DH) HPWMDR1 (000EH) 7 DATA7 7 DATA7 6 DATA6 6 DATA6 5 DATA5 5 DATA5 4 DATA4 4 DATA4 3 DATA3 3 DATA3 2 DATA2 2 DATA2 1 DATA1 1 DATA1 0 DATA0 0 DATA0 R/W (Initial value: **** ****) R/W (Initial value: **** ****)
Note 1: The PWM output pulse width varies with the clock duty cycle. Note 2: For the data registers, set data 10H to F0H. Note 3: When HPWMCR = 0, the internal counter is cleared and data "1" is output to the port. Note 4: Before selecting PWM mode, make sure HPWMCR = 0. Note 5: Before entering STOP mode, set HPWMCR all to 0. Note 6: If HPWMCR is altered in the middle of PWM period, the waveform may be distorted. To avoid waveform distortion, make sure HPWMCR = 0 when enabling HPWM output.
17.3 Functional Description
The high-speed PWM is controlled using the Control Register (HPWMCR) and Data Registers (HPWMDR0, 1). Before writing to these registers, set the HPWMCR = 1 to make them ready for setup. When the HPWMCR is set to 0, each control register is reset, so that the high-speed PWM can be reset in software.
17.3.1 Operation modes
The high-speed PWM has the following three modes of operation: * 8-bit mode: (T = 28 x clock period, f 78 kHz) * 7-bit mode: (T = 27 x clock period, f 156 kHz) * 6-bit mode: (T = 26 x clock period, f 313 kHz)
Note:These values apply to the case where the source clock (X1) is 20 MHz.
Use the HPWMCR to select operation mode. Note that operation mode is common to both channels, and cannot be set separately for each channel.
Page 194
TMP88CS43FG
17.3.1.1 8-bit mode
In 8-bit mode, it is possible to generate a pulse with 12.8 s period and approximately 78 kHz frequency (when X1 = 20 MHz).
Data register value x 50 ns 12.8 s 7 8-bit data 0 Data register Data register value x 50 ns 12.8 s
The minimum width of the pulse is 0.8 s (data "10"), and the maximum width of the pulse is 12.0 s (data "F0"). Pulse width = 8-bit data x 50 ns Figure 17-2 shows a typical waveform in 8-bit mode. (The values are for X1 = 20 MHz.)
Data
800 ns 12.8 s 800 ns 12.8 s
"10h"
850 ns 850 ns
"11h"
12.0 s
12.0 s
"F0h"
Figure 17-2 8-Bit Mode
17.3.1.2 7-bit mode
In 7-bit mode, it is possible to generate a pulse with 6.4 s period and approximately 156 kHz frequency (when X1 = 20 MHz).
Value of 1 low-order bits x 25 ns Value of 7 high-order bits x 50 ns 6.4 s
Value of 7 high-order bits x 50 ns 6.4 s
In 7-bit mode, the period is comprised of 7 bits (period = 27 x 50 ns) and one other bit provides a 25 ns resolution (half period of the source clock (X1)). Therefore, when the one low-order bit = 1, a plus-25 ns pulse is output. The minimum width of the pulse is 0.4 s (data "10"), and the maximum width of the pulse is 6.0 s (data "F0": "78" + "0").
7 0 Data register 7 hight-order bits 1 low-order bit
Pulse width = (7 high-order Bits of data x 50 ns) + (1 low-order Bit of data x 25 ns) Figure 17-3 shows a typical waveform in 7-bit mode. (The values are for X1 = 20 MHz.)
Page 195
17. 8-Bit High-speed PWM (HPWM0 and HPWM1)
17.3 Functional Description TMP88CS43FG
Data
400 ns
6.4 s 400 ns
6.4 s
"10h"
425 ns 425 ns
"11h"
6.000 s
6.000 s
"F0h"
Figure 17-3 7-Bit Mode
Note: The resolution of the LSB 1 bit (25 nsec) is a typical value and its precision is not guaranteed.
17.3.1.3 6-bit mode
In 6-bit mode, it is possible to generate a pulse with 3.2 s period and approximately 313 kHz frequency (when X1 = 20 MHz).
Varies with value of 2 low-order bits
6 high-order bits x 50 ns 3.2 s
6 high-order bits x 50 ns 3.2 s
In 6-bit mode, the period is comprised of 6 bits (period = 26 x 50 ns) and two other bits provide a 12.5 ns resolution. However, because the actually obtained resolution is 25 ns, said resolution is accomplished artificially. To obtain a 12.5 ns resolution, the first, second, and third pulses are output by adding 25 ns, 0 ns, and 25 ns, respectively. In this way, a 12.5 ns resolution is realized as being "equivalent to." The minimum equivalent width of the pulse is 0.2 s (data "10"), and the maximum equivalent width of the pulse is 3.0 s (data "F0": "3B" + "0").
7 0 Data register 6 high-order bits 2 low-order bits
Pulse width = (6 high-order bits of data x 50 ns) + (2 low-order bits of data *) * The equivalent plus times in 2 low-order bits of data are shown below.
2-bit data 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Equivalent plus time 0 ns 12.5 ns 25 ns 37.5 ns
Figure 17-4 Shows a typical waveform in 6-bit mode. (The values are for X1 = 20 MHz.)
Page 196
TMP88CS43FG
Data
225 ns
3.2 s 200ns
3.2 s 225 ns
3.2 s
"11h"
225 ns 225 ns 225 ns
"12h"
250 ns 225 ns 250 ns
"13h"
"14h"
250 ns
250 ns
250 ns
3.0 s
3.0 s
3.0 s
"F0h"
Figure 17-4 6-Bit Mode
Note: The resolution of the LSB 2 bit (12.5 nsec) is a typical value and its precision is not guaranteed.
17.3.2 Setting output data
To set output data, write it to the Data Registers (HPWMDR0 and 1). Example: To output a 5.75 s waveform in 7-bit mode using HPWM0 when the source clock (X1) = 20 MHz
5.75 s
6.4 s
Because the resolution in 7-bit mode is 50 ns, to output a 5.75 s pulse 5.75 s / 50 ns = 115 = 73H Because 73H is placed in the 7 high-order bits, the value is shifted one bit to become E6H. Therefore, set E6H in the Data Register (HPWMDR0).
Page 197
17. 8-Bit High-speed PWM (HPWM0 and HPWM1)
17.3 Functional Description TMP88CS43FG
Page 198
TMP88CS43FG
18. Input/Output Circuitry
18.1 Control pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP88CS43FG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remark
Osc. enable
fc VDD RO
High-frequency resonator connecting pins Rf = 1.2 M (typ.) RO = 0.5 k (typ.)
VDD
XIN XOUT Input Output
Rf
XIN
XOUT
RIN
RESET
VDD
Hysteresis input Pull-up resistor included RIN = 220 k (typ.)
Input
VDD D1
TEST Input
Pull-down resistor included RIN = 70 k (typ.) Fix the TEST pin at "L" level in MCU mode.
RIN
Note: The TEST pin of TMP88PS43 does not have a pull-down resistor (RIN) and protect diode (D1). Fix the TEST pin at "L" level in MCU mode.
Page 199
18. Input/Output Circuitry
18.2 Input/output ports TMP88CS43FG
18.2 Input/output ports
Port I/O Input/output Circuit Remark
Initial "High-Z" Data output
P0 P3 P4 P5 Tri-state output Programmable open-drain P3, P4, P5: Large-current port Hysteresis input
Output control
I/O
Disable Pin input
Initial "High-Z" Data output
P8 P9
Output control
I/O
Tri-state output Programmable open-drain
Disable Pin input
Initial "High-Z" Data output
P6 P7 I/O Tri-state output
Disable Pin input
Initial "High-Z" Data output
P1 I/O Tri-state output Hysteresis input
Disable Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
P2
I/O
Data output Pin input
Open-drain output Hysteresis input
Page 200
TMP88CS43FG
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The Absolute Maximum Ratings stipulate the standards, any parameter of which cannot be exceeded even in an instant. If the device is used under conditions exceeding the Absolute Maximum Ratings, it may break down or degrade, causing injury due to rupture or burning. Therefore, always make sure the Absolute Maximum Ratings will not be exceeded when designing your application equipment.
(VSS = 0 V) Parameter Power supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Symbol VDD VIN VOUT IOH Output current IOL1 IOL2 IOUT1 IOUT2 Mean output current IOUT3 IOUT4 Power dissipation Operating temperature Soldering temperature (time) Storage temperature PD Topr Tsld Tstg P4 P5 60 60 350 -40 to 85 260 (10 s) -55 to 125 C mW P0, P1, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9 P0, P1, P2, P6, P7, P8, P9 P3, P4, P5 P0, P1, P2, P6, P7, P8, P9 P3 Pins Standard -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -1.8 3.2 30 60 60 mA Total of all ports except large-current ports Total of 8 pins of large-current ports P30 to 7 Total of 8 pins of large-current ports P40 to 7 Total of 8 pins of large-current ports P50 to 7 QFP V Unit Remark
Page 201
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.3 DC Characteristics TMP88CS43FG
19.2 Operating Conditions
The Operating Conditions show the conditions under which the device be used in order for it to operate normally while maintaining its quality. If the device is used outside the range of Operating Conditions (power supply voltage, operating temperature range, or AC/DC rated values), it may operate erratically. Therefore, when designing your application equipment, always make sure its intended working conditions will not exceed the range of Operating Conditions.
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Power supply voltage High level input voltage Symbol VDD VIH1 VIH2 VIL1 Low level input voltage VIL2 fc Normal (P6, P7, P8, P9) Hysteresis (P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, RESET) Normal (P6, P7, P8, P9) Hysteresis (P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, RESET) XIN, XOUT VDD 4.5 V 0 VDD 4.5 V Pins fc = 20 MHz Condition NORMAL/IDLE/STOP Min 4.5 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 VDD VDD x 0.30 VDD x 0.25 20 MHz V Max 5.5 Unit V
Clock frequency
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
8
19.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol IIN1 Input current IIN2 IIN3 Input resistance RIN1 RIN2 ILO VOH IOL1 IOL2 TEST Sink Open Dran, Tri-state port
RESET , STOP
Pins
Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
-
-
2
A
TEST
RESET
90 VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 0.4 V VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 1.0 V - 4.1 1.6 - -
70 220 - - - 20 18 16 2
510 2 - - - 25 23 100
k
Output leakage current High level output voltage Low level output current NORMAL mode power supply current IDLE mode power supply current STOP mode power supply current
Sink Open Drain, Tri-state port Tri-state port P0, P1, P2, P6, P7, P8, P9 P3, P4, P5
A V
mA
IDD
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V fc = 20 MHz
- -
A
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25C, VDD = 5V. Note 2: Input current (IIN1,IIN3); The current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. Note 3: IDD does not include IREF current.
Page 202
TMP88CS43FG
19.4 AD Conversion Characteristics
(Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog reference voltage Analog input voltage range Analog reference power supply current Nonlinearity error Zero error Full scale error Overall error VDD = 5 V, VSS = 0 V AVDD = VAREF = 5 V AVSS = 0 V Symbol VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 5.0 V VSS = AVSS = 0 V Condition VSS = 0 V, VDD = AVDD Min VDD -1.0 VASS - - - - - Typ. - - 0.5 - - - - 1 1 1 2 Max 8 bit VDD VAREF 1.0 2 2 2 4 LSB 10 bit Unit
V
mA
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quantization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the idea conversion line. Note 2: Conversion time is different in recommended value by power supply voltage. About conversion time, please refer to "Register Configuration" in the section of AD converter. Note 3: Please use input voltage to AIN input pin in limit of VAREF - VSS. When voltage or range outside is input, conversion value becomes unsettled and gives affect to other channel conversion value. Note 4: Analog reference voltage range; VAREF = VAREF - VSS
19.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Machine cycle time High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width Symbol tcy tWCH tWCL Condition During NORMAL1 mode During IDLE mode When operating with external clock (XIN input) fc = 20 MHz Min 0.2 Typ. - Max 0.5 Unit s
25
-
-
ns
Page 203
19. Electrical Characteristics
19.7 Handling Precaution TMP88CS43FG
19.6 Recommended Oscillation Conditions
XIN XOUT
C1
C2
High-frequency oscillation
Note 1: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. Note 2: For the resonators to be used with Toshiba microcontrollers, we recommend ceramic resonators manufactured by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. For details, please visit the website of Murata at the following URL: http://www.murata.com
19.7 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown below. 1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath Solder bath temperature = 230 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used 2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath Solder bath temperature = 245 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows: Solderability rate until forming 95 % - When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 204
TMP88CS43FG
20. Package Dimensions
QFP80-P-1420-0.80B Rev 01
Unit: mm
Page 205
20. Package Dimensions
TMP88CS43FG
Page 206
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/X (LSI). Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software development. These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates. The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using. Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology. We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas. We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP88CS43FG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X